Drystar5302 Technical PDF

HEALTHCARE Technical
Global Services Organisation

Documentation
Order No.: DD+DIS150.05E
DRYSTAR 5302
*1YZO6N1*
1 Piece YZO6N MA1
Type 5366 / 100
1st Edition
printed in Germany 2005-09-09

Agfa Company Confidential
HEALTHCARE Technical
Documentation
Order No.: DD+DIS150.05E
DRYSTAR 5302
*1YZO6N1*
1 Piece YZO6N MA1
Type 5366/100
1st Edition
To order spare parts and Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 – 3760
spare part assortments: Fax.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 – 7388
To order documentation: Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3553

Fax.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 7271
Caution:
This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must only be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
Note:
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified
electrician.
Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified
technician.
CE Declaration:
The CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed
without explicit consent of the manufacturer!
This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
AGFA-GEVAERT AG HE/Im - GSO I&P

Tegernseer Landstr. 161 D-81539 München
pprinted in Germany 2005-09-09

OVERVIEW Pictograms and conventions for this documentation
0. Order List This documentation uses certain conventions (pictograms, way of writing) for better
understanding and faster locating of the required information.
1. Controls, Connections and
Set Up Procedures Explanation of the pictograms
2. Functional Description High voltage ! Waiting time
3. Repair and Service

Attention ! Required tools
3.1 Machine specific safety and
repair information
3.2 Machine specific tools, software Info Removal
tools and auxiliary equipment
3.3 Troubleshooting
Installation
3.4 Electrical and mechanical
codes, fuses, LED's Hint
Mechanical adjustment
3.5 Replacement of parts Required spare part
3.6 Adjustments and calibrations
3.7 Software menus, settings Electrical adjustment
3.8 Software-Releases, Patches
Required time
3.9 Frequently Asked Questions Calibration
4. Reference and Circuit

Diagrams
5. Spare Parts List
6. Accessories
7. Field Modifications
8. Manufacturing Standard Conventions

Modifications
Actions Way of writing Sample
9. Maintenance
Action, Switch the machine on Switch the machine on

10. Field Service Bulletins explanation
Action with the mouse or the <omni-cd.exe> Double-click the

11. Installation Planning "Return" key <omni-cd.exe> icon
1 2 3
Required text input via the vips Enter vips and click on
12. Glossary and Key Word Index keyboard <Continue>
HEALTHCARE Generic Safety Directions
Imaging Services
Safety Directions
for HealthCare Imaging Products
► Purpose of this document

This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant
information for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each
Service Documentation as well as Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via

MEDNET => GSO Library => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual
► Document History
Edition. Release Changes

Revision Date compared to previous Revision 1.1
1.2 04-2007 • Editorial rework to improve comprehensibility
► Referenced Documents
Document Title
n.a. n.a.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:
The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Document Node ID: 11849633
04-2007 printed in Germany Enclosure_e_template_v02
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2007 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Generic Safety Directions
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
Read this document prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
Strictly observe all safety directions within this document and on the product.

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 3

04-2007 Document number: DD+DIS238.06E Agfa Company Confidential
List of Contents
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DISCLAIMER .........................................................................................................6
2 USED ICONS.........................................................................................................7
3 LABELS..................................................................................................................8
3.1 CE Mark ...................................................................................................8

3.2 System Labels..........................................................................................8
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation.............................................9
4 PRODUCT COMPLAINTS ...................................................................................10
5 REFERENCES.....................................................................................................10
6 INTENDED USE ..................................................................................................11
7 INTENDED USER................................................................................................11
8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS ..........................11
9 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.........................................................12
10 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................13
11 COMPLIANCE .....................................................................................................14
12 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION .........................................................16
13 RADIATION PROTECTION .................................................................................17
14 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION .........................17
15 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES........................17
16 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES .............18
17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES ................................20
18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES.........21
19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES..........................23
20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................23


List of Contents
21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS ................................ 24
22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ................. 24
23 WASTE DISPOSAL ............................................................................................. 24
24 RECYCLING........................................................................................................ 25
25 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI)................................... 25


Disclaimer
1 Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you don’t
operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.


Used Icons
2 Used Icons
Icon Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
can be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action
Highlights unusual points
Indicates background information
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!


Labels
3 Labels
3.1 CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)
becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2 System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

C&W_005.cdr


Labels
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation
According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries. Each laser
source is classified from class 1 to class 4.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye.

Class 2: Laser units having a maximum output of 1 mW. The accessible laser
radiation only lies within the visible range of the spectrum (400 nm to
700 nm). With brief exposure times (up to 0.25 s) there is no danger
due to the blink reflex.
Class 3A: Laser units having a maximum output of 5 mW. The accessible laser
radiation becomes dangerous for the eye, if the cross section of
radiation is reduced by optical instruments. If this is not the case, the
emitted laser radiation in the visible region of the spectrum, with short
exposure times (up to 0.25 s), is not dangerous in the spectral
regions, even for long irradiation times.
Proper use must be observed.
Required safety equipment must be used.
Class 3B: Laser units having a maximum output of 500 mW. Dangerous to the
human eye and in particular cases to the skin.
Class 4: Laser units having a higher output than 500 mW. Extremely
dangerous to the human eye and dangerous to the human skin.
Manufacturer AGFA GEVAERT N.V. GIUM

Septestraat 27-2640 -Mortsel-BEL
1011 Date: 20 06-07
Type 5175/100 S/N
50-60Hz
100-12 0/220-240V 2.0/1.0A
Made in Germany
Pe issenberg
July 2 006
Figure 1: Example for Laser Classification


Product Complaints - References
4 Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident Agfa
HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written correspondence to
the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
Agfa
Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 7094
5 References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf


Intended Use - Intended Users - Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
6 Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
7 Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic X–Ray
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
before attempting to work with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make sure
that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the force of
law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.


Connections to other Equipment
9 Connections to other Equipment
Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment:

Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other
equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity
• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been
performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1
harmonized national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard
IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.


Accessories and Spare Parts
10 Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com


Compliance
11 Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
• ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
• ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Full quality assurance system ISO

13485
• ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.
Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products
IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic
safety and essential performance
ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to medical devices
IEC 60601-1-2 It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME

SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential in
determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the electromagnetic
environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment of use to permit
the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and provide its
ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.


Compliance
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/
• This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see www.iecee.org
Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.


Safety Directions for Operation
12 Safety Directions for Operation
Accessibility of the mains power switch:

CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
• Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare service
organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this Technical
Documentation.
• All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic t information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, Additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
• Ventilation openings must not be covered.
• If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
• Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
• If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
• Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen
which may cause an explosion.
Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.


Radiation Protection - Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection -
General Safety Directions for Service Activities
13 Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the
jurisdiction in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those
authorized by the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be
made of all radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
• Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
14 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
• Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
• Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.
15 General Safety Directions for Service Activities
• This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
• Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician
• Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
• The safety directions for operation (see section 12) are also valid for all service
activities.
• During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
• All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
• Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
• All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
• Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232 ,RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).


General Safety Directions for Service Activities -
Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
• When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you disconnect
or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a PCB
without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering (electrostatic
charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap on a
grounded conducting metal piece.
16 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection

device when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
• Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.


Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
• The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:

CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.


Safety Directions for Installation Activities
17 Safety Directions for Installation Activities

• If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare
trained personnel.
• If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
• Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
• When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
• Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains ...
• Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
• Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
• Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
• Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.


Safety Directions for Installation Activities -
Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
Ground potential differences :

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source
as the PC.
• When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in
different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a
HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
18 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities

• This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
• In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
• Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
• Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
• After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
• If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.


Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
• Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.

• Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
• Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the
manufacturer.
Checking ground connections:

WARNING:
Improper ground connection of the device metal housing may lead to electric
shocks.
• In case of power supply replacements or maintenance check the protective earth

resistance according to the national regulations.
• Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers are present


Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities -
Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts, Accessories and Devices
Opening PCs and Workstations:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
• Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
• Unplug before opening.
• Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.
19 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities
Remote Service Activities:

Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.
20 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
• In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
• Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.


Safety Directions concerning Modifications -
Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials - Waste Disposal
21 Safety Directions concerning Modifications

Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be
implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
22 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials

'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The “Hazardous Material”
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.
23 Waste Disposal
The Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), which
entered into force as European law on 13th February 2003, resulted in a major
change in the treatment of electrical equipment at end-of-life.
The purpose of this Directive is, as a first priority, the prevention of WEEE, and in
addition, to promote the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such wastes so as
to reduce the disposal of waste.
The WEEE logo on the product or on its box indicates that this product must not be
disposed of or dumped with household waste. The owner of the equipment is liable to
dispose of all electronic or electrical waste equipment by delivering to the specified
collection point for recycling of such hazardous waste, collection and proper recovery of
electronic and electrical waste equipment at the time of disposal will allow the producer to
help conserve natural resources.
Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment will ensure safety of human
health and the environment. For more information about electronic and electrical waste
equipment disposal, recovery and collection points, please contact your local, waste
disposal service or producer / distributor of this equipment.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators please

dispose of these separately according to local regulations.


Recycling - Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
24 Recycling
Recycling pass see http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf
25 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customer’s site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.


Document No: DD+DIS238.06E
Copyright © 2007 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
Published by
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Tegernseer Landstraße 161
D - 81539 München
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
printed in Germany
DD+DIS150.05E Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures
Chapter 1:
List of contents
1 General safety instructions............................................................ 1
2 Installation Checklist ...................................................................... 3
3 Printer Installation Wizard.............................................................. 5
4 Printer settings................................................................................ 8
4.1 Film calibration ................................................................................................. 8
4.2 Default densitometer ...................................................................................... 10
4.3 Film view.......................................................................................................... 11
4.4 Beep on empty tray......................................................................................... 12
4.5 RF Tag.............................................................................................................. 13
4.6 Site data........................................................................................................... 14
5 Film Calibration ............................................................................. 15
6 Printer - Modality connection....................................................... 16

6.1 Modality set-up ............................................................................................... 16
6.2 Logical printers Set-up................................................................................... 17
6.3 Printing of diagnostic and / or test images .................................................. 18
6.4 Image adjustments ......................................................................................... 19
6.4.1 Image Adjustments as described in the Connectivity Release Document.................... 19
6.4.2 Image Adjustment at the Modality................................................................................. 20
6.4.3 Basic Image Adjustment at the Printer via Key-Operator Menu ................................... 23
6.4.4 Alternative: Image settings via DICOM host profile: ..................................................... 26
7 Acceptance Test............................................................................ 27
8 Completion of installation ............................................................ 28

8.1 Customer Instruction...................................................................................... 28
8.2 Backup of Printer Settings............................................................................. 29
Printed copies of this document are not controlled.

The reader should always refer to MedNet to ensure that they are working with the latest copy of the document.
Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 1 / I
2005-09-09 (Type 5366/100) Agfa Company Confidential
1 General safety instructions
⇒ The DRYSTAR 5302 is suitable for continuous operation.

⇒ The DRYSTAR 5302 enables or helps in the diagnosis of a patient.
When operating or maintaining the DRYSTAR 5302 always observe the

following safety guidelines:
• Have electrical or mechanical defects repaired by skilled personnel only!
• Do not override or disconnect the integrated safety features.
• Ventilation openings may not be covered.
• Always switch off the DRYSTAR 5302 and disconnect the power cord
from the outlet before carrying out any maintenance work.
Always take into account the markings provided on the inside and outside
of the printer. A brief overview of these markings and their meaning is
given below:
Safety warning, indicating that the DRYSTAR 5302 User and

Reference Manuals should be consulted before making any
connections to other equipment. The use of accessory equipment
not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this
printer may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting
system. Consideration relating to the choice of accessory
equipment shall include:
Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment
has been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC
60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-2 harmonized national standard.
In addition, all configurations must comply with the medical
electrical systems standard IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes
the connections acts as system configurator and is responsible
for complying with the systems' standard. If required contact your
Agfa Service Organization.
In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any
covers.
Caution hot:
Keep hands clear from the Thermal Print Head.
Type B equipment:
Indicates that the DRYSTAR 5302 complies within the limits for
type B equipment.

Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 1 / 1
Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures DD+DIS150.05E
Supplementary protective earth connector:

Provides a connection between the DRYSTAR 5302 and the
potential equalization busbar of the electrical system as found
in medical environments. This plug should never be
unplugged before the power is turned off and the power plug
has been removed.
Intergrounding connector:
Provides a connection between the printer and other
equipment which might exhibit minor ground potential
differences. These differences may degrade the quality of
communication between different equipment. Never remove
connections to this terminal.
Protective earth (ground)
Provides a connection between the printer and the protective
earth of the mains. Do not remove this connection, because
this will have a negative influence on the leakage current.
Power/Reset Button
Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall
outlet in order to disconnect the unit entirely from the mains.
Precautions for use in USA only:
Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the
printer is connected to a 240 V/60 Hz source instead of a
120 V/60 Hz source.
Transport after installation
Before moving the printer, always switch off the machine. The DRYSTAR
5302 should always be transported by 2 persons. When doing this, the
stability and the structure of the table top have to be taken into account.
The printer should not be placed on a soft surface, since this might
prevent appropriate ventilation and cause overheating. Nothing else
should be installed on the same table, and measures should be taken to
prevent table shock, while this may cause image artifacts. The appliance
shall only be transported with all covers closed. The appliance shall not be
transported continuously from one location to the other. Do not lift the
printer by the output tray.
Waste disposal and environmental regulations

In most countries DRYSTAR film is considered industrial waste and is not
allowed to be disposed of as household waste. Please consult your local
waste disposal regulations. Agfa recommends to have DRYSTAR film
waste hauled away by a licensed company.
After its life span, do not dispose of the DRYSTAR 5302 without
consideration of local waste disposal regulations. Please consult your
local service organization.

Chapter 1 / 2 Drystar 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
Agfa Company Confidential (Typ 5366/100) 2005-09-09
2 Installation Checklist
Purpose of the installation checklist:
• to give an overview of all steps, that are required for the installation of the
printer;
• to provide a reference to the corresponding section of the "Drystar 5302
Plug & Play Installation Manual" (abbreviated: P&P) and "Controls,
Connections and Set Up Procedure" section where the topics are further
explained.
The "Drystar 5302 Plug & Play Installation Manual" is part of delivery and
can be downloaded on MEDNET, HealthCare library.
# Step Task refer to .... Okay

Code
Installation Prerequisites:
1. Check installation site prerequisites INS P&P 5
2. Check shipment completeness INS Packing Slip
3. Prepare required tools INS P&P 1
4. Remove transport protection locks INS P&P 6 to 8
5. Connect the cables INS P&P 9
Printer set-up:
6. Set film size tabs INS P&P 10
7. China only: Stick Chinese warning INS P&P 11
label above the existing one
8. Load films INS P&P 12 & 13
9. Startup the printer INS P&P 14
Printer Installation Wizard:

10. Go through printer installation wizard INS section 3

# Step Task refer to ..... Okay

Code
Printer settings:
11. Adjust Film calibration (optional) APPL section 4.1
12. Select Default densitometer (optional) APPL section 4.2
13. Set Film view (optional) APPL section 4.3
14. Adjust Beeps on empty tray (optional) APPL section 4.4
15. Adjust behavior for unreadable RF APPL section 4.5
Tag (optional)
16. Enter site data APPL section 4.6
Film calibration
17. Perform a film calibration for both film INS section 5
trays
Printer - Modality connection

18. Let the modality be set-up SIC section 6.1
19. Set-up logical printers (optional) SIC section 6.2
20. Print diagnostic and/or test images SIC section 6.3
21. Adjust image settings (optional) APPL section 6.4
Acceptance Test
22. Perform acceptance test APPL section 7
Completion of installation
23. Instruct the Customer in operation of APPL section 8.1
the printer
24. Save settings on backup CF card INS section 8.2

3 Printer Installation Wizard

The purpose of this section is to show the most important settings of the
printer during installation via Installation Wizard.
Before the printer installation wizard can be started, the steps 1 to 9 of the
Installation Checklist (refer to section 2) have to be completed.
The Printer Installation Wizard guides Printer Installation Wizard

step by step through different Key-operator
parameters. menu
Figure 1 beneath ...

8 Installation
• shows how to enter the
Installation Wizard 2 Printer Install. Wizard
• lists the parameters which have to

Language
be entered Date and Time
PRINTER IP-ADDRESS
NETMASK
ROUTER IP-ADDRESS
A more detailed description of the CALLED AE_TITLE
Hostname
printer Installation Wizard is available Domain name
in the Drystar 5302 Reference Daily used modality name
Brand
Manual in section 'Using the Modality Type
installation wizard'. CALLING AE_TITLE('modality name')
Select Output Tray
The Reference Manual is part of Preferred film type
delivery and available on MEDNET, Save configuration
Reset
HealthCare Library.
5364_Reg01_001_e.cdr
Figure 1

Remark concerning necessity of PC connection:

All adjustments at the printer can be made via browser connection.
Most adjustments can also be made via key-operator menu.
In following cases a PC network connection is mandatory, as these settings
only can be made via browser pages.
• To enter site specific data
• To configure Logical printers
• To define a host profile for special Image or Connectivity settings
(Annotations, OEM Lut etc.)
The example screens for configuration user interfaces are further on

browser related. The path to access the screens is the same for local
keypad and browser.
The way of entering data is more complex at the local keypad, as all data
have to be entered via the available four navigation keys, the escape and
confirm key.

Remark to PC Connection:
The printer default IP address is 169.254.10.10.
The printer automatically assigns an IP address to the PC, in case it is set-up
for obtaining an IP address automatically. This is done via Automatic Private
IP Addressing, short: APIPA. For more info refer to section 3.2.
Setting for Windows 98 / Windows ME / Windows 2000:
Select “Control Panel – Network – Properties – Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) –
Properties – Obtain an IP address automatically". Refer to Figure 2
Note: The path may differ for different operating systems.
Setting for Windows XP:
Select “Control Panel – Network Connections – Local Area Connection –
Properties – Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) – Properties – Tab: Alternative
Configuration – Automatic Private IP address". Refer to Figure 3
As the IP address of the printer after installation is usually different from

169.254.XXX.XXX, APIPA connection can only be used during installation.
After change of the IP address to one different from 169.254.XXX.XXX and
reboot the APIPA connection is not possible anymore.
Figure 2: Windows 98, ME, 2000 Figure 3: Windows XP network

network setting setting
Recommendation: Make a bookmark in your browser for

IP address 169.254.10.10

4 Printer settings
The purpose of this section is to show additional settings of the printer that are
not covered by the Printer Installation Wizard.
The following table lists these settings.
Printer Setting Importance Accessible via ...* Details see...

Film calibration optional Key-operator menu 4.1
Default densitometer optional Key-operator menu 4.2
Film view optional Key-operator menu 4.3
Beep on empty tray optional Key-operator menu 4.4
RF Tag optional Service menu 4.5
Site data mandatory Service menu 4.6
4.1 Film calibration
Accessible via menu: Key-operator menu - 2 Change settings - 4 Image

Quality - 1 General
Purpose of the setting: A) Define whether automatic calibration shall be

executed at insertion of a new film pack
B) If set on ON, define the number of filmpacks,
after which the film calibration shall be
executed.
Default value: ON - every 5 filmpacks
The film calibration menu is accessible via key-operator menu on the keypad
and key-operator menu via browser.

Example browser
Welcome to this
screen: DryStar 5302 printer
Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Default film calibration off

on
Default Densitometer Macbeth TR924

Gretag
X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer

Select frequency
Every 5 packs
536601fa.cdr
Figure 4

4.2 Default densitometer

Quality - 1 General
Purpose of the setting: Define a default densitometer. Density values

displayed during calibration or the QC procedure
will be displayed re-calculated for this default
densitometer.
Default value: Macbeth TR924
The default densitometer menu is accessible via key-operator menu on the

keypad and key-operator menu via browser.
Example browser
Welcome to this
Default film calibration off

on

Gretag
X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
536601fb.cdr
Figure 5

4.3 Film view

Accessible via menu: 2 Change settings - 2 Input tray
Purpose of the setting: Change the film view in case the film curl is
desired to be towards the light box
Default value: Normal
The film view menu is accessible via key-operator menu on the keypad and
key-operator menu via browser.
Example browser
Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Change input tray settings
Upper input tray
Film view Normal

Back
Tag film format 14x17"
Overruling to film format 14x17"

11x14"
14x14"
10x12"
Tag film type DT2B
Overruling to film type Drystar DT2B

Drystar DT2C
Lower input tray
Film view Normal

Back

11x14"
14x14"
10x12"
Tag film type DT2B

Drystar DT2C

536601fp.cdr
Figure 6

4.4 Beep on empty tray
Accessible via menu: Key-operator menu - 2 Change settings - 1

General
Purpose of the setting: Adjust whether or not the customer shall be

informed via audible beeps about an empty tray.
Default value: Audible alarm on - beep 5 times
The 'beep on empty tray' menu is accessible via key-operator menu on the
keypad and key-operator menu via browser.
Example browser
Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Change general settings

Date: 19 Oct. 2004
Time: 08 30 00
Language English
Chinese Simpl.
Japanese
Beep on empty tray 5 beeps

Keypad contrast (60 ... 80) 68 Typical 68
Keypad backlight (0 ... 100) 50
* Site name
* Site address
* City
* Country code (tel)
* Telephone
Modem
* Department
* Contact person
* Delivery address
E-mail address
Comments
536601fq.cdr
Figure 7

4.5 RF Tag
Accessible via menu: Service menu - 2 Change settings - 2 Input Tray
Purpose of the setting: Define the behavior of the printer in case the RF
tag is not readable or available
Default value: Printing with Dmax=2.00
The 'RF-tag' menu is accessible via service command session via browser
only.
Example browser
Welcome to this
Service - Change input tray settings

If RF-tag is missing or malfunctioning
Printing with Dmax=2.00
Printing not possible
Upper input tray
Film view Normal

Back

11x14"
14x14"
10x12"
Tag film type DT2B
Overruling to film type
536601fr.cdr
Figure 8

4.6 Site data
Accessible via menu: Browser pages - Service Engineer tools - Enter

key-operator command session - 2 Change
settings - 1 General
Purpose: Fill in site data to have an entry in the infocounter

about the installation site.
Default value: None
The site data menu is accessible via the browser pages only
Note: It is mandatory to fill in site data. Otherwise after each switch on /
reboot of the printer a hint is displayed to enter the site data.
Example browser
Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Change general settings

Date: 19 Oct. 2004
Time: 08 30 00
Language English
Chinese Simpl.
Japanese
Beep on empty tray 5 beeps

Keypad contrast (60 ... 80) 68 Typical 68
Keypad backlight (0 ... 100) 50
* Site name
* Site address
* City
* Country code (tel)
* Telephone
Modem
* Department
* Contact person
* Delivery address
E-mail address
Comments
536601fq2.cdr
Figure 9

5 Film Calibration
The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required for film
calibration
(1) Load the films the customer will

use in the upper and lower film
tray. Refer to note below.
(2) Select in key-operator menu
'6 Calibration - 1 Film
Calibration'
(3) Follow the instructions on the
display.
The calibration film will be
printed and measured
automatically by the printer
(see Figure 10)
(4) Repeat film calibration for
second input tray
536336as.cdr
Figure 10
The films delivered with the printer may only be used for test purposes.

6 Printer - Modality connection

The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required for
connection of the printer to the modality.
The following table lists these tasks.
Task Importance Accessible via ... Details see...

Let the modality be mandatory -- 6.1
set-up
Set-up logical printers optional Browser pages 6.2
Print diagnostic and/or mandatory -- 6.3
test images
Adjust image settings optional Key-operator menu 6.4
and Browser pages
6.1 Modality set-up
(1) Let the modality be set-up ate the modality.

(2) Tell the modality service engineer following printer parameters
• Printer Type (Agfa Drystar 5302)
• IP address
• AE-title
• Available film formats

6.2 Logical printers Set-up
Accessible via menu: Browser pages - Service Engineer Tools - DICOM

profile editor - Setup DICOM print SCP Servers
Purpose: Define more than one logical printer. This may be

required in case a modality sends images from
different applications to the printer. See also Info
next page
Default value: Only one logical printer.

Internal name: DEFAULT_SCP
Called AE title: DS5302
The DICOM print SCP setup menu is only accessible via the browser pages.
Example browser HOME HELP DICOM Print SCP Setup
screen: Setup one or more Dicom SCP servers on this device:

One 'Dicom Print SCP server' is capable of handling multiple Dicom
print associations
Dicom Print SCP
Internal Name: DEFAULT_SCP

Called AE title: DS5302
Listen at Port: 104
Max. allowed associations: 10
Secure channel (SSL):
Comments:
OK Create new Dicom Print SCP Cancel Changes require reboot
5366_Reg01_003_e.cdr
Figure 11
Before creating additional logical printers, first try to adjust the Image Quality
parameters at modality side! The default Image Quality of the printer fits
almost all applications!
Only if changes at the modality side cannot be done, or the modality does
not deliver the required results, create logical printers and make adaptations
for these applications at the printer side to reach the customers Image
Quality requirements.

To configure logical SCP printers can

be necessary, in case for example
printing is initiated at a PACS system,
which has several modalities as
input.
Example:
The PACS system collects CR and
DSA images.
• CR images shall be printed with
taste LUT Kanamori
• DSA images shall be printed with
linear taste LUT.
Problem:
The workstation at the PACS system
has one AE title. The Drystar 5302
does not recognize, for which type of
modality (CR or CT) the user wants
to print.
Solution:
• Create one logical printer
'Drystar5302_CT' and one
'Drystar5302_DSA'.
• Create two different host profiles Figure 12
for the two logical printers, one
with Kanamori LUT, the other with
linear taste LUT.
• In the workstation setup both
printers: The user has to select
the proper logical printer.
The number of logical SCP printers is not limited. As each configured SCP
server consumes resources of the printer, use as little SCP servers as
possible. Rule of thumb: Define max. 4 logical printers.
6.3 Printing of diagnostic and / or test images
(1) Print a few diagnostic images from the connected modalities.

(2) Compare them at the lightbox with the image on the monitor.

6.4 Image adjustments
Image adjustments in general can be made at the modality and / or the printer.
For many modality - printer combinations the required image adjustments are
described in a Connectivity Release Document.
The systematic image adjustment is split up in following steps:
Step # Description Details see...

1 Perform adjustments as described in the 6.4.1
Connectivity Release Document for the modality
- printer combination.
2 If required, try to perform image adjustments at 6.4.2
the modality
3 In case the required image adjustment at the
modality is not possible, perform it at the printer.
Possibility 1: Via Key-operator menu 6.4.3
Possibility 2: Via DICOM profile Browser pages 6.4.4
In case the printer is part of a solution (e.g. IDIS Solution), refer to the
solution specific requirements concerning image adjustments.
6.4.1 Image Adjustments as described in the Connectivity Release Document
Connectivity Release Documents describe all parameters and required

adjustments to guarantee:
• Communication between modality and the printer
• Image adjustment at the modality and / or the printer.
MEDNET Path Connectivity Release Documents are available in MEDNET, HealthCare

Library - General Info - Connectivity & Application
In case
• The customer is not satisfied with the adjustments as described in the
Connectivity Release Document or
• For this modality connection no Connectivity Release Document exists
Continue with next step: Image Adjustment at the Modality.

In case a Connectivity Release Document for a modality - printer connection

is available for Drystar 4500 (M), Drystar 5500 or Drystar 5300 only, this can
also be used for Drystar 5302.
The Drystar 5302 behavior is with some exceptions the same as the
behavior of the other printers mentioned above.
Main differences:
• Compared to Drystar 4500 M, the Drystar 5302 does not support
Mammo functionality (Dmax > 3.6 O.D)
• Compared to Drystar 5500, the Drystar 5302 does not support the
function to select a certain output tray (as only one is available).
• Compared to Drystar 5300, the Drystar 5302 supports 2 different film
sizes or types simultaneously.
6.4.2 Image Adjustment at the Modality
Before adjusting the image quality at the printer, first try to adjust it at the
modality as described here! The default Image Quality of the printer fits
almost all applications!
Only if changes at the modality cannot be done, or the modality does not
deliver the required results, make adaptations for these modalities at the
printer to reach the customers Image Quality requirements.
Contrast Adjustment at the Modality

The Look-Up-Table is responsible for the contrast of the image (in
combination with Dmin and Dmax) and may be named at the modality:
• Taste LUT
• Perception LUT
• Correction LUT
• Presentation LUT
If possible use the "Kanamori Taste LUT" (if available also Dmax) to define the
contrast.

Sharpness Adjustment at the Modality
Case 1: Modality sends in page mode:

In case the modality sends the images in page mode (i.e. it does not send
single images to the printer but already the complete, prepared image
information for one film) use Cubic Bell interpolation. It is defined via following
smooth factors:
Cubic Bell smooth factors

Possible range 299 (less sharp) to 200 (very sharp)
Reasonable values 251 (less sharp) to 235 (very sharp)
Default value 245
Interpolation Smooth Factors Legend

Limits
299 251 245 235
200 Default
Cubic Bell
299 251 245 235 200
less sharp sharp too sharp
Reasonable values
536601GJ.CDR
Figure 13
Case 2: Modality sends in image mode:

In case the modality sends the images in image mode (i.e. it sends single
images to the printer to let the printer compose the single images for one film)
use Cubic High Res interpolation. It is defined via following smooth factors:
Cubic HighRes smooth factors

Possible range 199 (less sharp) to 101 (very sharp)
Reasonable values 148 (less sharp) to 138 (very sharp)
Default value 143
Interpolation Smooth Factors
199 148 143 138 101

Cubic High Res
536601GK.CDR
Figure 14

The printer switches automatically to cubic Bell interpolation by evaluation of

the DICOM communication when no image scaling (i.e. magnification or
reduction) is required:
Cubic HighRes interpolation type does not sharpen the image.
Interpolation type 'Cubic Bell' sharpens the image however, independent
whether scaling is required or not.
This automatic switching is only performed in case the Interpolation Type is
adjusted to 'cubic high res' in the user profile (= default).
This behavior can be switched off via browser pages: Path "Service Tools -
Scaling Setup"
HOME HELP Controller Setup
Reduction icon on image: yes
Kernel: when no image scaling is needed for CubicHighRes:
Automatically switch to CubicBell: yes
Use CubicBell smooth factor: 0.9 ( >= 0.1 and <= 10 )
OK Changes require reboot

536401GN.CDR
Figure 15

6.4.3 Basic Image Adjustment at the Printer via Key-Operator Menu

Quality - <Modality XYZ>
Purpose: Adjust Image Quality in case it cannot be adapted

at the modality
Default value: • Look-up table: Kanamori. Refer to Figure 17

• Interpolation: Cubic HiRes -0.7. Refer to
Figure 18
• Dmax 3.20
Example browser
screen:
Welcome to this Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer DryStar 5302 printer
Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Daily used name CT2 Select kanamori like value:

Modality AE-title CT2_ARC 100
Linear Select abosulte smoothing factor: (advised = -0.7)
Look Up Table:
Kanamori
Kanamorilike -0.7
Interpolation:
Replication
Linear Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
CubicHi-res
CubicBell 536601fs.cdr
Maximum density: 280

285
290
295
Figure 16
Hint concerning interpolation settings:

Interpolation setting "Linear" usually gives too smooth image impression.
Interpolation settings "Replication" usually gives too "pixely" image
impression.
Both settings are used in exceptional cases only.

Possible Look up table settings
Dmax
Kanamori curve and
Kanamori like value
220 Kanamori_like 100 = Kanamori
200 Kanamori_like 200 = linear
100
Kanamori_like 220 = logarithmic
mori 75
Kana
Dmin Input
0 255
536401GM.CDR
Figure 17
Legend
Interpolation Smooth Factors (Kernel values) Limits
Default
5.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.1 5.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.1
Cubic Bell
Reasonable values
-0.2 -0.7 -1.2 536601GL.CDR
4.9 -4.9
Cubic High Res
Figure 18
For details regarding image adjustments refer to the Hardcopy Application

Manual DD+DIS078.05E.
Each of the image adjustment parameters can be set for a specific modality.
Changing a parameter value will change the value of the respective
parameters in the 'DICOM Host profile’ for that specific modality.

Important remark: In changing parameter values this does not automatically

ensure that the value is applied.
Two situations can be distinguished
• In case the modality does not send a parameter, the value set in the
printer is applied to the modality print job.
• In case the modality sends a parameter value, even when an empty
value (" ") is sent, this value still has priority above the value set in
the printer. So, the value sent by the modality has higher priority then
the value set in the printer, and therefore it is always preferred to set
the required parameter value at the side of the modality.
If this cannot be done, an overrule flag can be set for the respective
parameter in the 'DICOM Host profile'. Setting this overrule flag can
only be done by editing the 'DICOM Host profile' via browser.
Refer to section 6.4.4.

6.4.4 Alternative: Image settings via DICOM host profile:

Accessible via menu: Browser pages - Service Engineer Tools - DICOM
profile editor -
Purpose: Adjust Image Quality in case it cannot be adapted
at the modality
Default value: Refer to Figure 19
Example browser HELP Host Profile: Name XYZ
screen: These are the default settings for all print jobs coming from the host
(modality) specified under 'Calling AE title'.
The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input.
You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the left side.
Nick Name: Name XYZ
Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': Host AE
Use this profile only for local SCP server: all
Host Profile type: GENERIC-GENERIC Change
Number of Copies:
Print Priority: low
Polarity: normal
Film Orientation: portrait
Trim: no
Film Size ID:
Medium Type:
Print even if Film Size ID/Medium type not supported: yes
Print even if Application type not supported: no
Kernel: site Edit Custom Interpolation Type cubicHighRes,
Magnification: Edit Magn: max smoothFactor: -0.7
Pixel Size: Edit ratio: 1.0 / 1.0
Perception LUT: kanamori
Kanamori Like value:
Custom value:
Illumination (cd/m2):
Reflected Ambient Light (cd/m2):
Border Density (OD x100):
Empty Image Density (OD x100):
Minimum Density (OD x100):
Maximum Density (OD x100): site 300
Header Annotation:
Contents: none Edit Custom
Font: site Edit Custom
Footer Annotation:
Contents: none Edit Custom
Font: site Edit Custom
Window (%):
Level (%):
Image Orientation: r0
Conformance/Status Level: 0
Nevent enabled: off
Mammo modality: NO site
Association Timeout (s):
Image Timeout (s):
Allow IMPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN:
Allow EXPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN:
Allow EXPLICIT VR BIG ENDIAN:
Resolution: 508
Supported SOP classes: Edit
Early processing allowed: yes
LR like: off
OK Cancel Show Defaults Show last Input
Manually customized items are show in red
The last received input values are show in blue (click 'Show Last Input' button)
5366_Reg01_009_e.cdr
Figure 19
For details regarding image adjustments refer to the Hardcopy Application

Manual DD+DIS078.05E.

7 Acceptance Test
Purpose of the acceptance test:
Proof of printer reproduction capability of image on the monitor
Figure 20
Perform the acceptance test according to national regulations.
Example for Germany: DIN6868 Part 56
The German DIN6868 Part 56 is similar to the Image Quality Control

procedure based on IEC1223-2-4.
The Image Quality Control procedure based on IEC 1223-2-4 is described in
the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS078.05E.

8 Completion of installation
The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required for customer
instruction and backup of printer settings.
The following table lists these tasks.
Task Importance Accessible via ... Details see...

Instruct the Customer in mandatory -- 8.1
operation of the printer
Save settings on backup mandatory Key-operator 8.2
CF card menu
8.1 Customer Instruction
(1) Instruct the customer in following activities:
Activity Refer to User or

Reference Manual ....
Switching on the printer: Warm up time 7 min. User manual: "Switching on
the Drystar 5302"
Switching off the printer. It can take up to 20 User Manual: "Switching off
secs. until the printer switches off the Drystar 5302"
Loading films: RF tag and its function User Manual: "Loading
films"
Removing film jams Reference manual
"Troubleshooting: Clearing
of film jams"
Show dust stripes on a previous test film and Reference manual
how to prevent: "Troubleshooting Checklist"
• Keep printer always closed
• Clean TH resistor line with alcohol and
lint free cloth when dust stripes appear or
when printer displays "Printhead cleaning
(2) Hand over the user and reference manual to the customer

8.2 Backup of Printer Settings
(1) Open the upper film tray to take

out the CF card for storage of
the machine specific data.
(2) Select Key-operator menu "4
Save Configuration"
(3) Follow the further instructions on
초
the LCD display 2
5366_Reg01_017_e.cdr
Figure 21

DD+DIS150.05E Functional Description
Chapter 2:
List of contents
1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................... 2
2 Comparison to other AGFA B&W printers ............................ 3

2.1 Technical data .......................................................................................... 3
2.2 Technology and image manipulation ..................................................... 4
3 Film Run ................................................................................... 5

3.1 Backside Printing recognition................................................................. 8
3.2 Left / Right Shift Print Algorithm............................................................. 9
4 Calibrations ............................................................................ 10
5 Modules .................................................................................. 11
5.1 Printer modules ...................................................................................... 11
5.2 Hardware ................................................................................................ 13
5.3 Modules and E-Lables............................................................................ 15
6 Diagnostic Software .............................................................. 17
7 Thermal Model ....................................................................... 19

Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5302 Chapter 2 / I
Functional Description DD+DIS150.05E
1 INTRODUCTION
Purpose of the printer
• Medium resolution (320 dpi) DICOM network dry printer for 14x17", 14x14",
14x11", 10x12", 8x10" DT2 blue base or clear base films
Printing principle
• Direct thermal on thermo-sensitive, dry films. Blue based or clear based.
• 2 input trays and 1 output tray.
Main application
• Well suited to all medical applications, especially CR applications. Cannot
be used for mammography.
Connections
• Network connection only.
Service Concept
• Customer installable;
• No service PC needed for basic installation, maintenance and service, but
is convenient for entering detailed host profile settings, and needed for site
data;
• Replacements mainly on Module level; exception: cables
• All switches, sensors and motors are monitored via current measurement
on main engine controller (DEVIL CPU);
• If online diagnosis does not detect the exact reason for the error, an offline
check of the modules can be performed via browser pages.
DX-S CR QS
53
66
02
ad
Printer
Ultrasound .cd
r
Service
Host
Figure 1: Typical network installation of a Drystar 5302

Chapter 2 / 2 DRYSTAR 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
Agfa Company Confidential (Type 5366/100) 2005-09-09
2 Comparison to other AGFA B&W printers

2.1 Technical data
POWER
Drystar 5302 Drystar 5300 Drystar 5500

(SW 1.8X) (SW 1.9X) (SW 3.0X)
Weight 90 kg 55 kg 188 kg
Power 100-240V, 50/60 Hz; 100-240V, 50/60 Hz; 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz;
Requirements 70W (standby), 70W (standby), 200W (standby),
250W (printing); 250W (printing); 450W (printing),
530 (peak) 530 (peak) 700 W (peak);
Auto switching power Auto switching power Auto switching power
supply supply supply
Throughput: 75/h (14x17") up to 63/h (14x17") up to 100/h (14x17") up to
140/h (8x10“) 86/h (11x14“) 160/h (8x10“)
Max. Density: 3.2 O.D. 3.1 O.D. 3.2 O.D.
Resolution: 320 dpi 320 dpi 508 dpi
Number of 4992 4992 7104
resistors in TPH:
Grey levels 4096 out of 65535 4096 out of 65535 4096 out of 65535
Warm-up time: 4 minutes → queuing 4 minutes → queuing 4 minutes → queuing
7 minutes → printing 9 minutes → printing 9 minutes → printing
Available films DT2B / C DT2B / C DT2B / C
Nr. of 10 DICOM network 10 DICOM network 10 DICOM network
simultaneous associations associations associations
Inputs
Access time max. 77 secs max. 77 secs. max . 76 secs.
Film formats (inch) 8x10, 10x12, 11x14, 11x14, 14x17 8x10, 10x12, 11x14,
14x14, 14x17 14x14, 14x17
Film formats used 2 1 2
simultaneously
Max. number of 4358 x 5232 (14 x17") 4256 x 5154 (14 x17") 6922 x 8368 (14 x17")
image pixels on a 12 bit 12 bit 12 bit
film → 45,6 MB → 43,87 MB → 116 MB
Applications All medical All medical All medical
applications, except applications, except applications, except
mammography mammography mammography

Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5302 Chapter 2 / 3
2.2 Technology and image manipulation
POWER
Drystar 5302 Drystar 5300 Drystar 5500

(SW 1.8X) (SW 1.9X) (SW 3.0X)
Printing principle: Direct thermal Direct thermal Direct thermal
Calibration: Automatic / manual Automatic / manual Automatic / manual
Densitometer Fixed (CDM) Fixed (CDM) Horizontal scanning
(MDM)
Transfer Protocol DICOM DICOM DICOM, PS (Option)
Operating system Portex Java Portex Java Portex Java
Network protocols telnet, ftp, SMTP, HTTP telnet, ftp, SMTP, HTTP telnet, ftp, SMTP, HTTP,
for remote service
Image Data are sent by DICOM Data are sent by DICOM Data are sent by DICOM
manipulation host. Adjustments host. Adjustments host. Adjustments
(taste LUT, possible via "DICOM possible via "DICOM possible via "DICOM
interpolation etc.) host profile editor". host profile editor" host profile editor".
Image rendering via Image rendering via
"A#sharp" compensation "A#sharp" compensation
algorithm algorithm

3 Film Run
Cam drive Output Rollers

Motor
TH Suspension drive
Drum
CDM
Rollers driven by Filmrun
1 4
gearbox module 2
upper tray
3
(1 to 5)
Pickup Unit 5
Vacuum Pump
Filmrun
lower tray
536602ag.cdr
Figure 2: Filmrun through the printer
Description of one film cycle:
1. The vacuum pump starts. Refer to Figure 3.

2. The suction cups of the pickup unit move down to the film. Refer to
Figure 4.
3. The gear box module starts driving the rollers. In addition it opens the
feeding rollers at the pickup unit. Refer to Figure 5.
4. The pickup unit transports the film between the feeding rollers.
5. The gearbox module transports the film further towards TH
6. In case the film is transported upwards from the lower tray, the input
sensors monitor the film run. refer to Figure 6
7. The cam drive moves the TH up, to let the film edge be transported
between TH and drum. refer to Figure 7. refer to Figure 8.
8. Depending on the previous film width (14" or 10"), the suspension drive
changes position or stays in the current position (TH pressure
adjustment)
9. The cam drive closes the gap between TH and drum
10. The drum motor moves the film forward: The heat transfer from TH to
film takes place. Refer to Figure 9.
11. When the film edge reaches the output module, the CDM checks
"backside printing". Refer to section 3.1 and to Figure 13.
12. When printing is finished, the cam drive opens the gap between TH and
drum
13. The output rollers transport the film out of the printer. Refer to Figure 12.

Figure 3: Pump & Valves Module Figure 4: Film Pickup
Figure 5: Gear Box Module Figure 6: Input Sensors Module
Figure 7: Cam drive Figure 8: Suspension drive

Figure 9: Drum Drive Figure 10: Thermal Head
Figure 11: Print Drum Figure 12: Output Module
Figure 13: CDM Figure 14: Tag Reader

3.1 Backside Printing recognition
The printer checks when the film arrives at the CDM, whether a small
rectangle in the center of the film, at the very beginning of the printable area,
has Dmax.
In case the density is below a certain threshold, the film must have been
inserted wrong. The printer stops printing, informs the user of back-side
printing, to check the correct positioning of the film and to remove the film
jam.
Black Rectangle for
Backside Printing Recognition
Distance
TH - CDM
Film printed on the

Diagnostic Area Non-Emulsion side
("Backside").
Border
(O.D. between Dmin and Dmax; Backside printing
Refer to Host Profile parameter "Border Density")
Remove film jam
536602dc.cdr
Figure 15: Backside printing recognition
Hint: The emulsion side in general is

slightly smoother than the backing
Noise
layer. This can be heard by wiping (dB)
over it → The backing layer makes Backing layer
much more noise.
Emulsion layer
The backing layer has to be on top

when the film is laying in the tray.

3.2 Left / Right Shift Print Algorithm
At this position, where the TH has to print always Dmax, i.e. at the left and
right image border, the TH looses its characteristic relatively fast, which is
determined by the Micro profile calibration in production.
As a consequence, the TH produces after many prints small print stripes at
this position in 14" films, where the black border of the 10" films is located.
To prevent, that the TH has to print the black border always at the same
position, a left/right shift algorithm is built in.
For each film pack the complete image information is shifted slightly:
• pack 1 has 0 mm shift
• pack 2 has +0.5mm shift
• pack 4 has -0.5mm shift
• and so on
The clear left and right borders are influenced by this shift mechanism but they
are within specification.
Exaggerated image
artifact without
Image Info Image Info left / right shift algorithm
Left / right shift algorithm

+0,5 mm +0,5 mm
Image Info Image Info
Image Info Image Info Image Info
Image Info Image Info

14x17"
Shift of complete
8x10" Image Info
+- 0.5 mm
Image Info Image Info Image Info for each film pack
536602dd.cdr
Figure 16: Left / right shift print algorithm

4 Calibrations
The following table lists the different Drystar 5302 calibrations:
CDM TH profile Film
Film printed
Purpose To determine new reference To reduce vertical macro To measure the film
values for the CDM. This is banding (vertical density sensitometry and to use these
done via an external irregularities). Only macro values for internal reference,
densitometer. density compensation is so that the printer behaves
possible (in opposite to micro linear regarding density
compensation in production) reproduction. In addition, the
maximum density is adapted
To be done ..... • Whenever the internal • Unacceptable line artifacts • At maintenance
densitometer has to be visible in medical service test
• To compensate small
adapted to an external image
density variations of the
densitometer (for image
new film, when a new film
quality control)
package is used.
• if density reproduction
check is not ok
• After output module
replacement
Automatic yes/no No No yes, but only if switched on**
* to be adapted via key-operator menu '6 configure - 2 printer settings - Cycles to calibrate TH'
** to be switched on via menu '2 Change settings - 5 Image Quality - 1 General - Select Default for Film Calibration.

5 Modules
This section is divided in following sub-sections:
Item Section
Printer modules 5.1
Hardware 5.2
Modules and E-Lables 5.3
5.1 Printer modules
Figure 17: Printer Modules

# Name E-Label* Repairable Purpose Also used in MOD #

1 KEYPAD/DISPLAY Yes -- User Interface Drystar 5300 10
MODULE
2 GEAR BOX & BELT - -- Film drive towards TH - 14
3 SUSPENSION DRIVE - -- TH pressure adjustment (10" / - 15

MODULE 14" film width)
4 THEMIS 3 PCB W/O - Yes CPU (Operation; image - 12
RAM processing)
5 512Mb RAM MODULE - - RAM for operating system Drystar 5300 18
6 DEVIL PCB Yes Yes CPU (film run) - 08
7 VILIS COOLING FAN - -- Cools down Devil/Themis/RAM Drystar 5300 20
8 TPH COOLING FAN - -- Cools down TH - 16
9 POWER SUPPLY Yes -- Main power supply for all - 09

consumers
10 HARD DISC 73 GB - -- Data storage Drystar 4500 --
11 OUTPUT MODULE Yes Yes Film transport out of printer. - 06

Density measurement with
integrated CDM
12 TPH FILTER MODULE - -- TPH dust filter Drystar 5300 --
13 PUMP & VALVES ASSY - -- Vacuum for suction cups of Drystar 5500 17
pickup module
14 Input Sensors Module - -- Filmrun check before print - 11
drum
15 DRUM DRIVE MODULE - -- Drum drive - 07
16 OSB SWITCH BOARD - -- TH power Drystar 5300 --
17 PRINT DRUM MODULE - -- Print drum; Transport during - --

printing
18 THERMAL HEAD Yes Yes Image transfer to film Drystar 5300 05
19 TAG READER ASSY - -- Film tag reader Drystar 5500 --
20 UPPER / LOWER PICK Yes -- Film pickup via 2 suction cups - 03/04
UP MODULE
21 UPPER / LOWER TRAY - -- Film supply - 01/02
without Tag Reader
22 CAM DRIVE MODULE - -- TH position adjustment - 13
(printing / film transport in and
out of TH section)
*For description of E-Label refer to section 5.3, For Repairable/Inspection Part refer to section Fehler! Verweisquelle
konnte nicht gefunden werden..
Hint concerning completeness of this list:

This list does not show all spare parts. Parts that have no real function during
printing, like the covers or hand grips are not listed. Refer to chapter 5 for a
complete spare parts list.

5.2 Hardware
This section shows an overview of all hardware components and lists their
purpose.
Key 6 board Devil CPU SCSI Hard disk drive
> 73 GB
Display
RS232
ETH IDE
Sensors CF drive
Motors
Pumps
PCI
Power Supply
Data RS232
Thermal Head Themis board
Power 512 MB RAM
OSB Board
536602da.cdr
Figure 18: Hardware Components Overview
Hardware Component Description

Themis Board • CPU. Keeps the operating system and
application software in RAM (518 MB)
during operation.
• Keeps a flash EPROM for Bootup
• Performs image processing
Devil CPU • Controls all sensors, motors, valves
and pump
• Controls the power supply
• Sends the image data to the Thermal
Head
• Provides for following connections:
- SCSI interface to hard disk
- CF card reader
- Ethernet 10/100 Mb/sec. twisted pair
interface
- RS232 service port

Key 6 Board • Controls the display with 240 (width) x

64 (height) pixels
• Controls all buttons and LEDs
required for operation
Hard disk • Keeps the operating system, all
application software and diagnostic
data. The harddisk is divided into four
partitions:
- Partition C: application software with
fixed data, write protected during
normal operation
- Partition D: variable data to be
changed during operation like
configuration files, image annotation
files, calibration files.Partition E:
composed image / diagnostic data to
print on the film (image composition
map)Partition F: image queue with
diagnostic data
CF drive • To save or install data via CF card
type II
Thermal head • Transfers the diagnostic data (pixels)
via heating elements to the heat
sensitive film
OSB board • Switch board for the different TH
heating elements
• Provides the power for heating up the
resistor elements
Power supply • Supplies all voltages for the printer
(+3,3 V, + 5 V, +12 V, -12 V, +20 V,
+24 V, + 55V)
• Connected via RS232 interface to the
Devil board, to allow saving temporary
data before switch off

5.3 Modules and E-Lables
The E-Label is a small EPROM attached to the module, which keeps

information about the module, like e.g.
• Name
• Hardware Version
• Nr. of print cycles
• Last error code
An example for the readout of an E-Label is given in Figure 20
In case the E-label is defective or not connected the printer issues a warning
message. Printing is possible however also without E-label.
The decision, whether a module has an E-label or not depends on whether the
corresponding module ......
• can be repaired in the repair center
• is worth to be repaired
The table in section 5.1 lists, which module has an E-Label.
Figure 19: Example for E-Label at Power Supply

_____________________________
Name....................................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/name
Name....................................Value OUTPUT ASSY
HardwareVersion.................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/hardwareVersion
HardwareVersion.................Value 3
OrderNumber.......................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/orderNumber
OrderNumber.......................Value
PartNumber..........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/partNumber
PartNumber..........................Value
RdeNumber..........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/rdeNumber
RdeNumber..........................Value A333462.3
SerialNumber.......................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/serialNumber
SerialNumber.......................Value 40
FirstUseDate........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/firstUseDate
FirstUseDate........................Value
LastUseDate........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/lastUseDate
LastUseDate........................Value
HoursOfOperation...............Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/hoursOfOperation
HoursOfOperation...............Value 1876
NrOfCycles...........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/nrOfCycles
NrOfCycles...........................Value 21166
LastRepairDate....................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/lastRepairDate
LastRepairDate....................Value
RepairSiteName...................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/repairSiteName
RepairSiteName...................Value
NrOfRepairs.........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/nrOfRepairs
NrOfRepairs.........................Value 0
LastRepairCode...................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/lastRepairCode
LastRepairCode...................Value
LastModuleSpecificErrors...Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/lastModuleSpecificErrors
LastModuleSpecificErrors...Value HC205007
NominalCalIntensity............Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/rde/nominalCalIntensity
NominalCalIntensity............Value 9500
MinCalIntensity...................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/rde/minCalIntensity
MinCalIntensity...................Value 8500
MaxCalIntensity...................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/rde/maxCalIntensity
MaxCalIntensity...................Value 10500
_____________________________
RandomUri
RandomValue
backToMain produce request randomRequest reconfigureThisELabel
Figure 20: Example for E-Label content

6 Diagnostic Software
An online diagnosis software is permanently monitoring the correct feedback
signal and timing of the valves and the pump, motors and sensors which are
connected to the Devil module.
In case of a mismatch an error is issued.
Example message:
MOD04
Please replace module
Application Online Devil CPU

Printer Software Diagnosis
Software
Operating System
536602aa.cdr
Figure 21

Errors are internally divided into • incidents

• warnings
• defects
In general incidents are user clearable, warnings are "key-operator"

(= experienced user or hospital technician) clearable, whereas defects have to
be repaired by service personnel.
Warnings and error messages are written into the infocounter.
Errors: Classification and treatment

Filmrun
Step 1
user
clearable
Message in plain text.

Online E.g. 'close upper cover'
Diagnosis
key-operator
clearable
incident
everything no warning Message in plain text:
okay? E.g. CDM not calibrated
defect
yes
Infocounter
service
clearable
Filmrun
Step n Error message:
HC10907:
Suspension motor M3 not
connected or malfunctioning
536602af.cdr
Figure 22

7 Thermal Model
• The thermal model is a mathematical description of the interaction Film –
TH.
• The thermal model uses parameters like film thickness, thermal
conductivity of the film, TH temperature; environmental temperature, print
speed and resolution of the print head.
• The thermal model TMML (Thermal Model Multi Layer; R&D name of the
product Æ official name 'A # Sharp') describes this interaction very
accurate, leading to a very precise reproduction of the image.
• With the thermal model "TMML" the image looks very sharp and has the
image quality of a Laser Imager.
Heat of following
pixel
Heat of previous Drum
pixel temperature
Heat of neighbor
pixel TH temperature
Thermal Model
Mathematical
Pixel Stream Thermal Model
Description of Pixel Stream
Interaction Film - TH
Parameter Z Thermal conductivity

film
Parameter Y
Thermal sensitivity
film
Parameter X
Figure 23

Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Machine specific safety instructions and hints for repair work
Chapter 3.1:
List of contents
1 Machine specific safety equipment, precautions and hints........ 1

1.1 Safety equipment for repair work .................................................................... 1
1.2 Safety precautions of the printer..................................................................... 1
1.2.1 Safety switch................................................................................................................... 2
1.2.2 Supplementary ground cable .......................................................................................... 2
1.3 Guidelines regarding safety during service work .......................................... 3
1.3.1 General safety guidelines for service work ..................................................................... 3
1.3.2 Safety Guidelines for Printed Circuit Board Replacements ............................................ 3
1.3.3 Safety Guidelines regarding Service PC Connection ..................................................... 4
1.3.4 Safety Guidelines regarding the Thermal Print Head ..................................................... 4
2 Safety check upon completion of the repair work ....................... 5
2.1 Visual check ...................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Electrical check................................................................................................. 6
2.2.1 Basic Protective Earth Test............................................................................................. 6
2.2.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations. ...................................................... 7

Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5302 Chapter 3.1 / I
Repair and Service
1 Machine specific safety equipment, precautions and

hints
This section describes all machine specific safety aspects to be considered
during repair work on the printer.
It is divided into the following sub-sections:
Sub-section Details see..

Safety equipment for repair work 1.1
Safety precautions of the printer 1.2
Guidelines regarding safety during repair work 1.3
1.1 Safety equipment for repair work
During repair work at printed circuit boards it is mandatory to wear an anti-

static wrist strap (order no.: CM+9.9999 0830.0).
This avoids static discharges on electronic components. Static discharges
can lead to defective components on the printed circuit boards.
1.2 Safety precautions of the printer
This section describes all machine specific safety precautions built into the
printer.
It lists following safety precautions:
Safety precaution Details see..

Safety switch 1.2.1
Supplementary ground cable 1.2.2

Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5302 Chapter 3.1 / 1
Repair and Service
Machine specific safety instructions and hints for repair work DD+DIS150.05E
1.2.1 Safety switch
• The machine has one safety

switch, located below the top
cover.
• It serves as a safety feature if
someone opens the machine e.g.
to remove a film jam. S8
When the top cover is opened, the

safety switch is activated.
536631aa.cdr
It cuts off the voltage to all motors
and the print head.
Figure 1
For service purposes the safety switch SW1 can be overridden by

means of a service key. In this case there is a risk of injuries by moving
mechanical or current-carrying electrical parts.
Before the printer is closed the service key must be removed again,
otherwise the mechanism of the safety switch may get damaged.
1.2.2 Supplementary ground cable
To meet the regulations for the printer according to the machine standards
EN60601-1 there is usually no Supplementary ground cable required. This
also applies to installations in the patient's room.
Exception:
• The printer is located in the patient's room AND is connected to
equipment not corresponding to EN60601-1.
In this case a Supplementary ground Equipotential plug

cable must be connected to the
provided 'Equipotential plug'
connector at the back of the printer.
The supplementary ground cable is

not included in the machine
shipment.
Specifications of the cable:

• green/yellow color, 536631JM.cdr
• cross-section of 4 mm2.
Figure 2

Chapter 3.1 / 2 DRYSTAR 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
Repair and Service
1.3 Guidelines regarding safety during service work
This section describes the safety guidelines to be considered during service

work.
Safety precaution Details see..
General safety guidelines for service work 1.3.1
Safety Guidelines for Printed Circuit Board Replacements 1.3.2
Safety Guidelines regarding Service PC Connection 1.3.3
Safety Guidelines regarding the Thermal Print Head 1.3.4
1.3.1 General safety guidelines for service work
The following points must be observed during all repair or maintenance work:
Make sure to always disconnect the machine to be repaired or maintained
from the mains.
• Caution: Even when the machine is switched off, as long as it has not
been disconnected from the mains some components may still be
supplied.
• Caution: If the mains connection is absolutely necessary for the
respective action (repair and maintenance work), this job must only be
done by trained personnel.
• Before printer service or replacing conductive parts always switch off the
printer and disconnect the power.
• Before switching the printer off make sure that there are no films being
printed at this time.
• Replace defective parts with original spare parts only.
1.3.2 Safety Guidelines for Printed Circuit Board Replacements
When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must
be observed:
• Always switch off the printer and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
• When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never
touch any parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
• PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry
a PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
• Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected
from electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.

Repair and Service
1.3.3 Safety Guidelines regarding Service PC Connection
Most of the Service PCs are not in compliance with the EN60601-1
standards. Therefore a Service PC which is to be connected via RS232 or
RJ45 interface to a printer must not be connected to the mains but must be
operated on its internal battery supply (low voltage). Only in this case the
printer keeps its EN60601-1 compliance.
However, if the service PC is connected to the RS232 or RJ45 interface and
has to be connected to the mains, take care, that nobody touches the printer.
1.3.4 Safety Guidelines regarding the Thermal Print Head
During operation the Thermal Print

Head gets hot (up to 70 °C).
• Avoid contact with the Thermal

Print Head due to the risk of burn.
• Observe the corresponding sticker
on the Thermal Print Head.
Figure 3
When replacing the Thermal Head the following points must be observed:
• The thermal head has a printed circuit board integrated. This means, that
the same safety guidelines apply for the Thermal Head than for printed
circuit boards (see 1.3.2.)
• The aluminum surface, on which the Thermal Head is mounted, may not
be scratched during replacement of the Thermal Head. Possible scratches
have to be removed with a sand paper or a file, to prevent uneven
pressure of the Thermal Head on the film.
• When replacing or cleaning the Thermal Head take care not to damage
the Thermal Head: Too high pressure on the TH film guide can lead to the
failure of single heating elements. Be aware, that the Thermal Head is a
very sensitive part and has to be treated very cautiously

Repair and Service
2 Safety check upon completion of the repair work

Upon completion of any repair job, especially after replacing or installing
conductive parts, check the following points as a routine safety check.
Country specific regulations must be observed as well.
Safety check Details see..

Visual check 2.1
Electrical check 2.2
2.1 Visual check

• Make sure that the power cord and the cables inside the machine do not
show any signs of damage.
• Make sure that the ventilation slots before the print head and the power
supply are free and that the print head and power supply ventilation is
working properly.
• Make sure, that no obstacles can cause stumbling (e.g. cables), and no
defective covers, sharp edges or parts sticking out in the vicinity of the
machine can cause injuries.
• Make sure that no smoldering spots or wrong cabling is visible.
• Make sure that all grounding connections to metallic covers are present.

Repair and Service
2.2 Electrical check
In case of power supply replacements or Maintenance check the protective

earth resistance according to the national regulations.
The electrical check is split up in two steps:
Step Task Details see..

1 Perform the basic protective earth test 2.2.1
2 Perform the electrical check according to 2.2.2
National Regulations.
2.2.1 Basic Protective Earth Test

(1) Use a multimeter that is
capable to measure a
resistance < 1 Ohm
(2) Put one probe at the ground
connector of the mains input
(3) Put the other probe at a few
metallic parts, the customer
could touch. 536631JN.cdr
The electrical resistance has to

be ≤ 0.2 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 4. 2
Figure 4

Repair and Service
(4) Insert the power cord at the

printer side; leave it
disconnected at the wall side.
connector of the mains
connector.
(6) Put the other probe at a few 536631JK.cdr

could touch.
The electrical resistance in this
case has to be ≤ 0.3 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 5.
Figure 5
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement exceeds the limits (0.2
Ohm without mains cable; 0.3 Ohm with mains cable) check the printer for
loose grounding connections!
2.2.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations.

(1) Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations.
The electrical checks that have to be performed in certain intervals (e.g. each
12 months) or after certain service actions (repair and/or maintenance)
depend on National Regulations.
Example for Germany: BGV A3 and DIN VDE 0751 or subsequent
regulations.

Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary means
List of Contents
1 Machine specific Tools..............................................................1
1.1 Mandatory tools ......................................................................................... 1
1.2 Optional tools............................................................................................. 2
1.2.1 Minimum configuration of the Service PC ................................................................3
1.2.2 Recommended configuration of the Service PC ......................................................3
2 Software Tools ...........................................................................4

2.1 Key-operator menu on the local keypad .................................................. 5
2.2 Infocounter ................................................................................................. 5
2.2.1 Infocounter Analysis via Printers Infocounters Report .............................................7
2.2.2 Infocounter Analysis via Service Command session ...............................................8
2.2.3 How to evaluate the Infocounter ..............................................................................8
2.3 Test images ...............................................................................................10
2.3.1 Testimage STI1......................................................................................................11
2.3.2 Testimage STI2......................................................................................................13
2.3.3 Testimage SMPTE .................................................................................................14
2.3.4 Testimage Medical_Image .....................................................................................16
2.3.5 Testimage LinCheck ..............................................................................................17
2.4 Show Error Codes.....................................................................................18
2.5 Web Pages.................................................................................................18
2.5.1 Operator Tools .......................................................................................................20
2.5.2 Key-Operator Tools................................................................................................21
2.5.3 Service Engineer Tools ..........................................................................................22
2.5.4 Connection to the web pages.................................................................................25
2.5.5 Usage of the web pages ........................................................................................29
2.6 Printer Logging .........................................................................................37
2.6.1 Required information for the support center...........................................................37
2.6.2 Printer Bootup-Message ........................................................................................39
2.7 ADVP ..........................................................................................................43
2.7.1 ADVP as DICOM print SCU ...................................................................................44
2.7.2 ADVP as DICOM print SCP (Print Emulator) .........................................................44
2.7.3 ADVP as Communication Recorder.......................................................................46
3 Software Installation................................................................49
3.1 SW Update: Loading a SW Patch ............................................................49
3.1.1 Software Update via CF card .................................................................................50
3.1.2 Software Update via a remote computer................................................................50
3.2 Emergency SW Installation on a new, empty Hard Drive ......................51
3.3 Emergency SW Installation on a printer in
"Error - System Failure" state..................................................................52

Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 3.2/I
Repair and Service
1 Machine specific Tools

In addition to the conventional service tools which every service engineer has
in his toolbox, the following tools are required for service on the printer:
1.1 Mandatory tools

The mandatory tools are required for repair, troubleshooting or maintenance of
the printer.
Tool Part Number Purpose
Anti-static wrist strap CM+9.9999.0830.0 To avoid static discharges
on electronic components
Cleaning tissue (box of 50 CM+309931.0 To clean the TH
pieces)
Densitometer* To be bought locally To perform CDM
calibration
Ink Eraser 'Pelikan' 10+999991176.0 For the 'dry TH cleaning'
procedure
Isopropyl Alcohol and lint Commercially To clean the TH.
free cloth available Alternative to Cleaning
tissue
Loop 8x CM+9.9579.9904.0 To check image quality of
films at the lightbox
Service key CM+9.0426.6309.0 To override the safety

switch
Standard ruler (1mm) Commercially For horizontal image
available adjustment
*As DT film used in the Drystar printers has a slightly different color
compared to conventional films, different densitometers give different density
readings, depending on the light source.
To make a correct density measurement use only a calibrated densitometer

MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, X-Rite 341, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag
D200-2. Other densitometers are not supported.

Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 3.2/1
Repair and Service
Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary means DD+DIS150.05E
1.2 Optional tools

The optional tools are required in exceptional cases only.
Tool Part Number Purpose
Crossed network EB+72010270 To get access to the printer
cable or commercially homepage, in case access via the
available hospital network is not possible.
RS232 null-modem EB+44160021 To get access to the printers
cable for the Service terminal level. Only required in
PC (SUB D 9F/9F) exceptional cases for
troubleshooting.
Compact Flash EB+72010600 To read/write the CF-cards on a
reader/writer USB Desktop/Service PC.
PCMCIA CF-card EB+72010160 To read/write the CF-card on the
adapter Service PC.
External CF-card CM+343356.0 To install and/or save software &
128 MB data.
Service PC Commercially To perform different service actions
available. (access to the printer homepage;
evaluate infocounter etc.)
See also 1.2.1
and 1.2.2 on
page 3.

Chapter 3.2/2 Drystar 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
Repair and Service
1.2.1 Minimum configuration of the Service PC

The following specification is an absolute minimum configuration for the
Service PC:
Type Laptop
Screen VGA compatible, 800x600 Pixel
Mouse integrated
CPU Pentium, 133 MHz
RAM 64 Mbytes
Hard disk 2 Gbytes
Disk drive 3.5 ‘ – 1.44 Mbytes
CD-ROM drive 24-times
Serial port COM1 or COM2 available
Network board Ethernet ≥ 10 Mbps
Operating system Windows 95, 98 or NT
Browser Internet Explorer ≥ 5.0
Modem analog 56 Kbps or ISDN
As the printer has a CF card reader integrated, it is important to have a

Service PC with CF card reader (USB or PCMCIA)
1.2.2 Recommended configuration of the Service PC

The national Agfa GICS department (Global Information and Communication
Services) is responsible for selection and configuration of the Service PC.
The actual specification is available via Agfa Intranet: Follow the link:
Agfa Intranet – IT helpdesk - GICS Intranet - Infrastructure Standards - Agfa
standards for PCs, laptops, printers, organizers, mobiles,...
For employees not directly working at Agfa - and so not getting the service
PC directly from GICS, we recommend to use the minimum configuration of
the Service PC mentioned above as a guideline regarding PC hardware and
software.

Repair and Service
2 Software Tools
Following software tools are available
Software Tool Purpose Details see..
Key-operator Perform most of the required service 2.1
menu on the local actions
keypad
Infocounter Troubleshooting 2.2
Test images Troubleshooting image faults; 2.3
Confirmation of perfect image quality
Show error codes View reason, meaning and cure of error 2.4
codes
Web Pages Perform DICOM attribute adjustments, 2.5
e.g. image adjustments
Logging View the online logging for 2.6
troubleshooting purposes
ADVP Test the DICOM communication 2.7
between modality and printer
Besides the functions offered in the Service menu and the WebPages no
other service software is available nor required.

Repair and Service
2.1 Key-operator menu on the local keypad
PURPOSE The key-operator menu allows most of the actions that are required for
installation, repair and maintenance of the printer.
USE (1) Press the Key-operator menu key

to select the Key-operator
menu.
(2) With the and keys select
the desired menu, (or the desired
character when entering text).
(3) Use the and keys to
select the desired digit.
(4) Press to confirm a selection or
to cancel.
536601ga.cdr
Figure 1
NOTES (1) The Key-operator menu is also available via the Web pages
(username: drystar, password: 5302).
(2) For a complete description of the Key-operator functions, please refer to
the DRYSTAR 5302 Reference manual.
An overview of all key-operator menus is available in section 3.7,
‘Software menus, Settings’.
2.2 Infocounter
PURPOSE The infocounter is used for troubleshooting purposes and for investigation of
the printer history before maintenance.
It contains following information:
- General information about the printer
- Information about the installation site of the printer
- Information about the configuration and hardware components of the
printer
- Statistics about service interventions
- Statistics about machine reliability
- Error history
This information about the printer is located in a persistent database.
Every 10 minutes there is an automatic update of the database on the hard
disk.

Repair and Service
A copy of the infocounter data is always stored in the battery RAM of the
printer. At software installation the contents of the battery RAM are written to
the hard disk drive.
This guarantees, that the infocounter data are not lost after exchange of the
hard disk drive
To view the infocounter a service PC is required.

Two possibilities exist to get the infocounter on the Service PC:
# Type of Infocounter analysis: Refer to ...

A Via Printers Infocounters Report 2.2.1
B Via Service Command session 2.2.2
We recommend to use for Infocounter Analysis method A, 'Via Printers

Infocounters Report', as this is the fastest way to access the infocounter.
Method B, 'Via Service Command session ' might be useful, when you can
access a PC in the hospital network for a short time, to save the infocounter
file on the printer CF card for analysis on the Service PC.

Repair and Service
Welcome to this
SERVICE TOOLS
HOME General information
List of errors
A Printer Infocounters report
DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report
QA Report Page
Software versions
Remote sessions
Show printer status
Enter key-operator command session
Enter service command session B
Release remote command session
Scalingtools
Connectivity Setup
DICOM profile editor
Welcome to this
7 Service Actions DryStar 5302 printer
LPD Profile Editor
Network configuration
5 Logging Printqueue editor
Service - Loggings
Controller logging
2. Infocounters
1. To printer flash card
Modules
2. To this computer
Module repair
Go back
536609cf.cdr
Figure 2
2.2.1 Infocounter Analysis via Printers Infocounters Report

(1) Connect the Service PC to the
Service PC
network
(2) Start the browser (Internet
Explorer ≥ 5) Printer
(3) Enter the IP address of the
printer in the address window.
(4) Select menu "Service Engineer
Tools - Printer Infocounters 536632el.cdr
Report"
(5) Analyze the infocounter file as
described in section 2.2.3, Figure 3
How to evaluate the Infocounter

Repair and Service
2.2.2 Infocounter Analysis via Service Command session

Service PC
network
Tools - Enter Service Command 536632el.cdr
Session - 7 Service Actions - 5

Logging - 2 Infocounters"
(5) Save the infocounter file to the Figure 4
service PC or the CF card.
(6) Unzip the
ICN_drystar5302_xxxx_DATE.zi
p
(xxxx stands for serial number)
file
(7) Analyze the infocounter.txt file
as described in section 2.2.3,
2.2.3 How to evaluate the Infocounter
Infocounters.txt evaluation
What to check in the Comment
infocounter
1.1 Serial number and Compare device serial number with chapter 8
Installation date ‘Manufacturing Standard Modification’ to
determine whether the device possibly requires a
modification.
Refer to 3.3 (infocounter.txt), ‘HW Modification
History’, to check already made modifications.
1.4 Software Info Compare the currently installed SW version with
the latest SW version described in chapter 3.8,
SW releases, patches.

Repair and Service
infocounter
2.3 Reliability Should normally be not higher than 0.05. Higher
fault rates need a thorough investigation.
3.3 Hardware Modification By comparing the status of the device with the
History available modifications (refer to Technical
Documentation chapter 8) the exact hardware
status can be determined.
3.4 Software modification By checking the software modification history it
history can be determined, whether a recent software
upgrade solved a problem, that occurred quite
often in the error list in the past
5.3 Retries Many retries (> 1%, based on relative prints)
have to be investigated: They may reduce the
throughput of the device.
5.7 Error History Check which errors occurred in the last days,
how often they appeared as well as the CBF
(cycles between failures) of these errors. This
gives an overview of the current status of the
machine.
5.8 Error list (sorted by Troubleshoot these errors with the help of the
relative) and technical documentation, chapter 3.3,
‘Troubleshooting’.
5.9 Error list (sorted by
total):

Repair and Service
2.3 Test images
PURPOSE The test images are used to check the complete printer function as well as
checking the image quality and certain adjustments
The list enclosed gives an overview of the different test images. This list is
based on software release 1.8.
Name / Purpose Thumbnail picture Details see..

'STI1' 2.3.1
Composed of many different test
images to check all aspects of
image quality.
'STI2' 2.3.2
Composed of many different test
images to check all aspects of
image quality.
‘SMPTE’ 2.3.3
Standard test image for evaluation
of image quality.
‘Medical_image’ 2.3.4
Test image to check, whether
image artifacts, which are slightly
visible in one of the technical
images, are also visible in a
medical test image.
‘LinCheck’ 2.3.5
Test image with 11 increasing grey
values. Used for density
reproduction check.

Repair and Service
2.3.1 Testimage STI1
PURPOSE Composed of many different test images to check all aspects of image
quality.
USAGE (1) In the browser pages select menu

'Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Service Command Session - 3
Print Testimage - STI1.ZIP'.
(2) The test image as displayed in
Figure 5 will be printed.
Figure 5
EVALUATION Evaluate the test image at the

lightbox as follows:
(1) Field 1 contains a continuous
grey wedge from grey value 0 to
255.
Check: no single grey steps may

be visible (in case single grey
steps are visible, this is called
'contouring'. The naming for this
artifact is derived from the contour
lines in a hiking map).
Figure 6

Repair and Service
(2) Field 2 consists of 256 small squares, with grey values from 0 to 255.
Each square has inside another smaller square, with a grey level which is
2 grey steps darker than the surrounding square.
Check: all 256 squares must be visible. In addition, a contrast difference
must be visible between the individual square and the small square
inside.
(3) Field 3 contains a flat field with density value 2.0.
Check: no stripes in any direction may be visible.
In case an artifact in the image can be observed, refer to chapter 3.3,

troubleshooting for symptom, reason and cure.

Repair and Service
2.3.2 Testimage STI2
PURPOSE Composed of several different test images to check most aspects of image
quality.

Print Testimage - STI2.ZIP'.
Figure 7

(1) Field 1 contains white and black
lines / dots of 1, 2 and 3 pixel
width
Check: all lines / dots must be

visible
(2) Field 2 consists of a SMPTE
testimage. Refer to 2.3.3
(3) Field 3 consists of a flatfield with
Dmax 1.0
Check: No line artifacts in
horizontal or vertical direction
may be visible.
Figure 8

Repair and Service
2.3.3 Testimage SMPTE
PURPOSE Standard test image for evaluation of image quality and for trouble shooting
(see chapter 3.3.).
USAGE (1) In the key-operator menu select '3

Print Image - 1 Testimage -
SMPTE_xxx.tif'.
• SMPTE_lin.TIF: Taste LUT

linear. Dmax = Dmax Printer
• SMPTE_l300.TIF: Taste LUT
linear. Dmax = 3.0
• SMPTE_kan.TIF: Taste LUT
Kanamori. Dmax = Dmax Printer
Figure 9

Repair and Service

(1) Fields 1 (4x) consist of 6 squares
with horizontal and vertical black
and white stripes (1, 2 and 3
pixels wide).
Check: Each of the 6 squares

must show constant distance
between the black and white lines
(no interferences may be visible,
leading to unequal distances).
(2) Fields 2 (4x) have the same
pattern as fields 1, but less
contrast
Figure 10
Check: All 6 squares must be visible.
(3) Fields 3 (3x) consist of several squares with the same density.
Check: The individual squares must show constant density. No stripes or

other artifacts.
(4) Field 4 consists of a black square (100% black) with a smaller grey
square inside (95% black)
The square must show 2 different densities, i.e. inside there must be a
smaller square with slightly lower density.
(5) Field 5 consists of a white square (0% black) with a smaller grey square
inside (5% black)
Check: The square must show 2 different densities, i.e. inside there must
be a smaller square with slightly higher density.
(6) Field 6 consists of a black square (100% black).
Check: The square must show Dmax (default: 3.2 O.D.)

(7) Fields 7 consists of a white square (0% black).
Check: The square must show fog level (for clear based film approx. 0.1
O.D., for blue based film approx. 0.2 O.D.)
To check density reproduction, especially for Dmax, use the LinCheck.ZIP

test image and measure in the "Density measurement area", as there also
the CDM is measuring. Only in this case the measured densities are
comparable.

Repair and Service
2.3.4 Testimage Medical_Image
PURPOSE Test image to check, whether image artifacts, which are slightly visible in one
of the technical images, are also visible in a medical test image.

Print Testimage -
Medical_image.ZIP'.
Figure 11
EVALUATION Evaluate the test image at the lightbox as follows:
(1) This medical test image of a chest is the most critical medical test image
regarding visibility of image artifacts, due to its huge bright areas. In
bright areas the eye is most sensitive.
Check: image artifacts, like stripes in horizontal or vertical direction,

which are slightly visible in a technical image (e.g. STI test image), may
not be visible in the medical test image.

Repair and Service
2.3.5 Testimage LinCheck
PURPOSE Test image to check density reproduction.

Print Testimage - LinCheck.ZIP'.
536632ga.cdr
Figure 12
EVALUATION (1) The test image contains a grey Density measurement area
wedge. This grey wedge is
measured during the density
reproduction check.
Refer to chapter 3.6,
Adjustments.
536632gb.cdr
Figure 13
For check of density reproduction only measure in the density measurement

area, as there also the CDM is measuring.

Repair and Service
2.4 Show Error Codes
PURPOSE View ‘Reason - Meaning - Cure’ at the local display to an error that appeared
at the printer.
USAGE Possibility 1: View the last error code:
(1) In the key-operator menu select ‘7 Service Actions - 1 Error messages’
Possibility 2: View all error codes:

(1) In the browser pages select menu 'Service Engineer Tools - List of errors’
2.5 Web Pages

The web pages provide for following menus:
Welcome to this
Operator tools
Key-operator tools
Service engineer tools
Specialist tools
Security Tools
HELP
Figure 14

Repair and Service
Menu Content (Short description) Refer to .....

Operator Tools Printer queue management for the 2.5.1
operator
Key-Operator Tools Same like Key-Operator menu on local 2.5.2
display
Service Engineer Functions for configuration and 2.5.3
Tools troubleshooting of the Controller part of
the printer
Specialist Tools Software tools reserved for R&D to Not further
perform special actions during test described
phase of the printer.
Security Tools Software Tools to configure user Not further
access control and secure described
communication as defined by HIPAA.
This menu is reserved for the Hospital
Security Manager
Help Describes purpose and content of the Not further
Web pages menus. described
A detailed structure of the web pages can be found in chapter 3.7, Software
menus, settings.
For more information to the webpages refer to .....

• section 2.5.4 for Connection to the web pages
• section 2.5.5 for two examples about the usage of the webpages

Repair and Service
2.5.1 Operator Tools
Welcome to this
Operator - Printer Status

HOME
Id Patient Name Host Created On Sent Status Priority
875 XYZ CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Printing Normal
878 XYZ CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Calculating Normal
879 XYZ CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Waiting Normal
Delete Set Emergency View Status
Figure 15
Main Purpose Printer queue management for the operator

Username / Password operator / operator
Sub menus None
Comment --

Repair and Service
2.5.2 Key-Operator Tools
Welcome to this
KEY OPERATOR TOOLS

HOME Remote sessions
Figure 16
Main Purpose Provides same functions like Key-Operator

menu on local display
Username / Password drystar / 5302
Sub menus 1. Enter key-operator command session: Shows
list of menus like Key-Operator menu on local
keypad.
2. Release remote command session: Makes a
reset on the key-operator command session,
to release the connection, in case the key-
operator command session hangs.
As long as a key-operator or service command session via web pages is

active, access to the printer via local keypad is not possible.
The printer will show the message: 'Remote Service active'.
Do not work with the key-operator or service command session web pages at
the printer as long as the customer is using the printer.

Repair and Service
2.5.3 Service Engineer Tools
Welcome to this
SERVICE TOOLS
List of errors
Printer Infocounters report
QA Report Page
Software versions
Remote sessions
Show printer status
Enter service command session
Connectivity tools
Scaling Setup
LPD Profile Editor
Printqueue editor
Controller logging
Module repair
Modules
536632hb.cdr
Figure 17
Main Purpose Provides functions for configuration and

troubleshooting of the Controller part of the
printer
Username / Password mega / ******
Sub menus 1. List of errors: Shows list of all HC.... error
codes. Same content like chapter 3.3,
appendix, error codes..
2. Infocounters Report: Shows printer
infocounter.
3. DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report*: Shows
infocounter of the Controller part of the
printer.
4. Software versions*: Shows SW versions of
printer and controller part of the printer.
5. Show printer status: Shows possible
warnings or defects or user messages which
are currently displayed at the local display.
6. Enter key-operator command session: Same

Repair and Service
function like Key-operator Menu on local

keypad.
7. Enter service command session: Same
function like Service Menu on local keypad.
8. Release remote command session: Makes a
reset on the Key-operator / Service command
session, to release the connection, in case
the session hangs.
9. Reboot Drystar*: Reboots the printer.
10. Scaling Setup: Menu to define general image
interpolation related settings
11. DICOM profile editor: Different menus to
define printer behavior regarding DICOM
communication.
12. LPD profile editor: Different menus to define
printer behavior regarding Postscript
communication
13. Network Configuration: Allows special
network settings to adapt to other network
devices.
14. Printqueue editor*: Provides functions for
extended queue management.
15. Controller logging*: Provides functions to
view, filter, adapt and save log files.
16. Modules: Provides functions to check sensors
and motors of single modules.
Refer to Figure 17
As long as a key-operator or service command session via web pages is

active, access to the printer via local keypad is not possible.
The printer will show the message: 'Remote Service active'.
Do not work with the key-operator or service command session web pages at
the printer as long as the customer is using the printer.

Repair and Service
Figure 18: Service Engineer - Modules Pages

Repair and Service
2.5.4 Connection to the web pages
USAGE (1) Connect the Service PC to the

Service PC
network
(3) Enter the IP address of the printer
in the address window.
In case the printer homepage is
not displayed, refer to 2.5.4.1 536632el.cdr
‘Adaptation of the PC IP address‘

next page.
Figure 19
As an alternative, if it is not possible Printer
Crossed UTP network cable
to put the Service PC into the hospital
network:
(1) Use a crossed network UTP cable
to connect the network interface 536632ek.cdr
of the Service PC directly with the

network interface of the printer.
Explorer ≥ 5)
(3) Enter the IP address of the printer
in the address window. In case Figure 20
the printer homepage is not
displayed, refer to 2.5.4.1
‘Adaptation of the PC IP address‘
next page.

Repair and Service
2.5.4.1 Adaptation of the PC IP address

To connect the printer and the Service PC via network, usually the IP
address of the Service PC has to be adapted.
Basic rules:
Case 1: The service PC is part of the hospital network.
(1) Get the IP address and possibly the subnet mask* for the Service PC
from the hospital network administrator. In case the hospital network
administrator wants to have the Service PC working only in a subnet, get
from him the netmask (also called subnet mask).
(2) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 21 to Figure
24.
Case 2: The service PC is not part of the hospital network, but connected
via crossed UTP network cable to the printer.
(1) Look up the printer IP address and subnet mask in the printer key
operator menu ‘show settings - Network’.
(2) Define an IP address for the Service PC by adding or subtracting ‘1’ to
the last digit of the IP address.
Example: Printer IP address = 10.6.5.121
Service PC address = 10.6.5.122 or 10.6.5.120
(3) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 21 to Figure
24.
Figure 21 Figure 22

Repair and Service
*Default Subnet Masks (set for NO subnetting)
Class First 3 digits of IP subnet mask

A 0......126 255.0.0.0
B 128......191 255.255.0.0
C 192.......223 255.255.255.0
Figure 23 Figure 24

Repair and Service
2.5.4.2 Adaptation of the Browser Proxy Settings

In case the connection to the Internet is configured for a connection via Proxy
server, this has to be disabled to be able to connect to the printer:
(1) In the Internet Explorer select "Tools - Internet Options"
(2) Select tab "Connections"
(3) In case a proxy server is configured, tick the checkbox "Bypass Proxy
server for local addresses".
Figure 25

Repair and Service
2.5.5 Usage of the web pages

(1) Enter the IP address of the printer in the address window.
In case the printer homepage is not displayed, refer to 2.5.4.1 ‘Adaptation
of the PC IP address‘ previous page.
(2) Select the desired menu
(3) Enter user name and password when prompted (mega / ******)
Enclosed two examples which shall explain the usage of the web pages:
# Example description refer to ...

1 Adapt the taste LUT for a certain host by creating a 2.5.5.1
host specific DICOM host profile
2 Adapt the annotations for all DICOM inputs 2.5.5.2
Welcome to this
Operator tools
Key-operator tools
Service engineer tools
Specialist tools
Security Tools
HELP
Figure 26: Homepage of the printer

Repair and Service
2.5.5.1 Example 1: Adaptation of the taste LUT (contrast)

Whenever the host with AE title ‘CTSCAN200’ sends a print job to the
printer, the taste LUT shall be adapted to ‘Kanamori_like 200’.
(1) In the printer homepage select
Welcome to this
'Service Engineer tools - Enter DryStar 5302 printer
service command session'

SERVICE TOOLS
(2) Enter username and password
(3) Select ‘DICOM profile editor’ List of errors
(4) Select ‘New’. DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report
Refer to Figure 28. QA Report Page
Software versions
Remote sessions
Show printer status
Enter service command session
Connectivity tools
Scaling Setup
LPD Profile Editor
Printqueue editor
Controller logging
Module repair
Modules
536632et.cdr
Figure 27
(5) In the host profile window select

‘change’ at the ‘host profile
type’, to see, whether the
connected host is part of the
hosts database. Refer to Figure
29.
Figure 28

Repair and Service
Figure 29: Host profile editor SW Re. 3.0.0_C1
(6) Select the connected host if

present, otherwise leave it on
‘generic’.
Figure 30

Repair and Service
(7) Select the desired parameter, in this case ‘Perception LUT =

Kanamori_like’ and set the ‘Kanamori_like value’ to 200.
(8) Check the checkbox before ‘Perception LUT’.
(9) Enter AE title and nickname (nickname = the name the stuff uses for
this modality. The nickname will be displayed in the queue). Refer to
Figure 31.
(10) Select ‘Submit’
Now whenever the host with AE title ‘CTSCAN200’ sends a print job to the
printer, the taste LUT will be adapted to ‘Kanamori_like 200’.
In case the checkbox is checked before a parameter in the DICOM profile

editor, this parameter is used, no matter whether the modality sends the
parameter or not (‘overwrite functionality’)
In case the checkbox is not checked, the value defined in the host profile is
only used, in case it is not sent by the modality.
Image adaptations should be made preferably at the DICOM modality.

According to DICOM specifications, controlling the printer completely is done
at the modality.
The description below about creating a DICOM profile should only be
required, in case the modality does not allow to adapt a certain parameter or
does not provide it.

Repair and Service
HELP Host Profile: Scanner
These are the default settings for all print jobs coming from the host
The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input.
Nick Name: Scanner
Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': CTSCAN200
Use this profile only for local SCP server: all
Number of Copies:
Print Priority: low
Polarity: normal
Film Orientation: portrait
Trim: no
Film Size ID:
Medium Type:
Print even if Film Size ID/Medium type not supported: yes
Kernel: site Edit Custom
Magnification: Edit
Pixel Size: ratio: Edit
Perception LUT: kanamoriLike
Kanamori Like value: 200
Custom value:
Illumination (cd/m2):
Reflected Ambient Light (cd/m2):
Border Density (OD x100):
Minimum Density (OD x100):
Annotation 1: site Edit Custom
Annotation 2: site Edit Custom
Window (%):
Level (%):
Image Orientation: r0
Conformance/Status Level:
Nevent enabled: off
Mammo modality: NO site
Association Timeout (s):
Image Timeout (s):
Allow IMPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN:
Allow EXPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN:
Allow EXPLICIT VR BIG ENDIAN:
Resolution:320
Supported SOP classes: Edit
Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes):
OK Cancel Show Defaults Show last Input
Manually customized items are show in red
536602er.cdr
Figure 31

Repair and Service
• In general: all DICOM host profile

and LPD profile web pages have
an online documentation
included.
• It can be viewed by pressing the

HELP button.
Figure 32
2.5.5.2 Example 2: Define annotations for all inputs

In this example the defaults for all hosts, independent of the AE title are
adapted. Here it is only possible to adapt the annotations.
(1) In the printer homepage select 'Service Engineer tools - Enter service
command session'
(2) Enter username and password
(3) Select ‘DICOM profile editor’
(4) Select ‘Default site annotations: EDIT’. Refer to Figure 33.

Repair and Service
Figure 33
(5) Select ‘Annotation 1’ Refer to
Figure 35.
Refer to Figure 34 to see,
where annotation 1 is located.
(6) Enter the annotation text:
Example:’ St Joseph's
Hospital.....’
(7) Possibly adapt the font and font
size of the annotation.
(8) In the ‘Annotation Box 1’ select
‘Submit’.
(9) Check the checkbox before
‘Annotation 1’.
(10) Select ‘Submit’. Figure 34
Now independent of the AE title all
films will have annotation 1 ‘St.
Joseph's Hospital.....’

Repair and Service
Figure 35: Site Defaults Window

Repair and Service
2.6 Printer Logging

Item "Printer Logging" is divided in following sections:
# Section refer to ...
1 Required information for the support center 2.6.1
2 Printer Bootup Message 2.6.2
2.6.1 Required information for the support center

In case of persistent problems like Connectivity / DICOM problems or film
jams it may be required - as part of the escalation procedure - to send all
logfiles, session files and infocounters to the support center.
Proceeding:
Step # Descpription Comment
Step 1 In the Service Engineer Tools go to "Controller --
Logging"
Step 2 Set tasks --
- PrintJobHandler
- DCMPrintSCP_0
- DCMPrintSCP_1 (if available)
to TRACE
Step 3 Produce the fault by sending an image from the --
modality or by printing a test image
Step 4 Reboot the printer --
Step 5 Get the session files See note 1
Step 6 Get the infocounter file See note 1
Step 7 Save the " DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report" See note 2
Step 8 Send the --
• Session file
• Infocounter file
• DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report
to your support center
At sporadic problems (Connectivity / DICOM problems; film jams) skip Steps

1 to 4. Immediately start with step 5
Note 1: Path for session file / infocounter:

Enter service command session – 7 service actions – 5 logging – 1 session
reports (select all files) / 2 Infocounters report – To this computer

Repair and Service
Note 2: How to save the " DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report"
In the "Service Engineer Tools" go to the "DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report"
page – right mouse key – save page as.
2.6.1.1 How to view the logfiles offline
Step # Descpription Comment

Step 1 Install the PIDEX Available on MEDNET, GSO Library
tool
Step 2 Extract the See note below
corresponding log
file of the session
file.
Step 3 In the PIDEX tool
select "Tools –
logview" and open
the desired logfile
Step 4 In the PIDEX tool go It is also possible to select a single

to function "Edit – word in the logfile. Then all other
find" to find the occurances of this expression are also
desired information. highlighted.
A session file is named e.g.

DS5302_1052_SES_21OCT2005_09-55-48.ZIP, where the different figures
represent following information:
DS5302: Printer (Drystar 5302)
1052: Serial Number
SES: Session File
21OCT2005: Current date
09-55-48: Current time HH-MM-SS
Interesting for troubleshooting are following files within the SES files:
• devil.log (controller and print engine);
• time.log

Repair and Service
2.6.2 Printer Bootup-Message
PURPOSE The printer terminal level provides following service action:

• An online logging, which displays all actions of the printer software during
bootup.
The printer terminal level is not intended to be used as official service tool.
It is only used for troubleshooting, e.g. to view the boot-up messages.
USAGE (1) Connect the Service PC to the
printer as displayed in Figure 36.
(2) Start the HyperTerminal as
displayed in section 2.6.2.1.
(3) Switch the printer on:
Now the bootup message 536632ep.cdr
appears
When the Printer login appears
the bootup message is finished.
Figure 36
2.6.2.1 Setup of the HyperTerminal

The hyper terminal setup as displayed here can be used for all AGFA
devices.
Instead of the HyperTerminal following other programs can be recommended
to connect to terminal level:
• xt.
xt.exe is an AGFA program, which is part of the IMOS package. It can be
started in a DOS box by typing ‘xt’
• IMOS Start Menu.
The IMOS Start Menu software has a terminal built in. Select ‘tools -
terminal’. Depending on the configuration of IMOS Start, either a DOS
box with xt will be opened or a Hyper terminal window will pop-up.
(1) To start the setup of the HyperTerminal, go to ‘Programs - Accessories -
HyperTerminal - HyperTerminal’

Repair and Service
Figure 37
(2) Enter a name for the connection,

e.g. AGFA
Figure 38
(3) Select COM1 or COM2 for

communication port (depending
on what you are using on the
Service PC)
Figure 39

Repair and Service
(4) Make the setup of the

HyperTerminal session as
displayed here, i.e.
- 9600 Bps
- 8 data bits
- no parity
- 1 stop bit
- flow control Xon/Xoff
(5) Select ‘OK’
Figure 40
(6) Select ‘Properties’
Figure 41

Repair and Service
(7) Select ‘settings’
Figure 42
(8) Select ‘VT100’ for emulation type
(9) Press ‘OK’
Figure 43
(10) Press <Enter>
Now the bootup message or login

prompt is visible.
Figure 44

Repair and Service
2.7 ADVP
The latest version of ADVP can be downloaded from MEDNET GSO Library
(Hardcopy - Wet Imagers - LR DICOM Controller - Freeware)
PURPOSE DICOM troubleshooting tool
USAGE ADVP can be used for following purposes:
# Purpose Details see…

1 Send test images from the service PC to the printer 2.7.1.
via network
2 Record DICOM print sessions for further 2.7.2
troubleshooting.
3 Record DICOM print sessions for changing and re- 2.7.3.
sending them to the printer.
ADVP can run on the service PC or any Windows PC in the network. The
only pre-requisite: The PC must be part of the network.
536632eq.cdr
Figure 45

Repair and Service
2.7.1 ADVP as DICOM print SCU
ADVP as DICOM print SCU can be used to check the DICOM interface of
the printer. In this case ADVP sends a test image to the printer.
(1) Start ADVP

(2) Select 'Basic Grayscale' in the
'Start up configuration' screen.
(3) Select 'Test - Print Film'
(4) Select 'SMPTE' (or any other
test film).
(5) In the 'Configuration' window fill
in Called (Printer) AE Title and
'Printer IP address'.
(6) Select 'OK'. Now the desired test
film is sent to the printer.
Figure 46: ADVP as Print SCU
2.7.2 ADVP as DICOM print SCP (Print Emulator)
ADVP as DICOM print SCP can be used to check the DICOM

communication sent from the modality. ADVP in this case emulates the
printer. The communication can be evaluated on site or by a product
specialist in the GSC or RSC.

Repair and Service
(1) Disconnect the printer from the

network.
(2) Give the IP address of the
service PC the same IP address
like the printer*
(3) Start ADVP
(5) Select 'Application - Print
Emulator - Start'
(6) In the following window fill in
- Called (Printer) AE Title (this is
the AE title of the printer),
- 'Called (Host) AE Title'
- ADVP Listen port (usually 104:
this is the port the modality
sends DICOM messages).
(7) Select okay. Now ADVP is
prepared for recording the
communication between
modality and the printer.
Figure 47: ADVP as Print Emulator
*In case ADVP runs on the printer, just select 'Stop Controller' to stop the
application software (and so switch off the DICOM SCP functionality of the
printer). When communication recording is finished, close ADVP and select
'Start Controller'.

Repair and Service
2.7.3 ADVP as Communication Recorder
ADVP as Communication recorder is recording the communication between

the modality and the printer, and allows to modify every single DICOM
attribute as well as resending the recorded image with the changed
attribute(s).
In general, following configurations are possible:
a) Service PC is part of the network: The modality sends to the service

PC, the service PC transmits the DICOM image and control data on
the fly to the printer. Modifying the DICOM data can be done without
changing the configuration.
b) Service PC is only temporary integrated in the network to emulate the

printer: The modality sends to the service PC, ADVP on the service
PC transmits the DICOM image and control data to a DICOM Print
SCP on the service PC (e.g. ADVP as Print Emulator). Re-sending
the DICOM data to the printer then requires re-configuration of ADVP.
In this chapter we describe the possibility a) Service PC is part of the

network.

Repair and Service
Part 1: Recording the DICOM data
(1) Change the IP address of the

printer to any free IP address
in the network (e.g.
192.9.200.202)
(2) Give the service PC the
former IP address of the
printer (e.g. 192.9.200.201)
(3) Start ADVP
(5) Select 'Application - Comms
Recorder - Start'
(6) In the following window fill in
- Called (Printer) AE Title (this
is the AE title of the printer),
- 'Called (Host) AE Title',
- ADVP Listen port (usually
104: this is the port the
modality sends DICOM
messages),
- Printer IP address (this is the
IP address of the printer)
- printer listen port (usually
104).
(7) Select okay. Now ADVP is
prepared for recording the
communication between
modality and the printer.
Figure 48: ADVP as Comms
Recorder

Repair and Service
Part 2: Resending the DICOM data

Recorder - Stop'
Recorder - Modify'
(3) In the Printer Snapshot edit
the desired parameters
Recorder - Replay': Now the
image is re-sent to the printer
and printed at the printer with
the adapted data.
Figure 49: Resending the DICOM

data

Repair and Service
3 Software Installation
You want to ... Example Refer to .....

Upgrade the SW to a higher SW Upgrade from SW Rel. Chapter 7,
basic release 1.80_C1 to 2.0.0_C1 Modifications
Update the SW with a patch SW Update from 1.8.0_C1 to 3.1
1.8.1_C1
Install SW on a new, empty Install SW 1.8.0_C1 on an 3.2
hard drive or. empty hard drive
Re-install the software on a Re-Install SW 1.8.0_C1 on a 3.3
printer in ERROR - SYSTEM printer that does not bootup
FAILURE state. anymore.
• A software upgrade is a functional extension. It is usually sold through

the Sales and Services Channels
• A software update is a corrective modification of the basic software
version. It does not include new functionality. SW Updates (Patches) are
available on MedNet.
3.1 SW Update: Loading a SW Patch

This chapter describes the SW Update with a patch.
For instructions regarding SW upgrade to a higher basic release (e.g. SW

Upgrade from SW Rel. 1.80_C1 to 2.0.0_C1) refer to Chapter 7,
Modifications
A SW Update can be performed in two ways:
SW Update via ... Refer to .....

Key-operator menu at the local keypad using the CF card 3.1.1
Service menu in the Webpages using the network 3.1.2
connection

Repair and Service
3.1.1 Software Update via CF card
Purpose Software Update: Installation of a software patch
SW Upgrade (1) In the key-operator menu select '9

Installation - 1 Software
Installation - 1 From CF card'
(2) Follow the further instructions on
the local keypad.
(3) After the software update print a
SMPTE test image (Key Operator
초
menu: 3 Print Image - 1 2
Testimage - 2 SMPTE.zip') and a
test image from every modality to
5366_Reg01_017_e.cdr
confirm the successful update.
(4) Re-new the backup on CF card. Figure 50
3.1.2 Software Update via a remote computer
Purpose Software Update: Installation of a software patch

(1) Establish a web browser
SW Upgrade Service engineer tools
connection to the printer. Refer to
chapter 2.5, Web Pages Username
mega
(2) In the printer homepage select Username
'Service Engineer Tools - Enter ******
Key-operator Command Session - Enter Key-operator command session
9 Installation - 1 New Software 9. Installation
Installation - 1 This computer' 1. New Software Installation
(3) Select 'Browse' Welcome to this

(4) Select the ZIP file to be uploaded Key-Operator - Installation
(e.g. DS5302_SWR_180C1.zip). Choose Dataset Browse .....
(5) Follow the further instructions in Proceed Go Back Reset Values
the web pages 536632eo.cdr
Figure 51
(6) After the software update print a SMPTE test image (Key Operator menu:
‘3 Print Image - 1 Testimage - 2 SMPTE.tif') and a test image from every
modality to confirm the successful upgrade.
During file upload it is not checked, whether the software you are uploading
is really software for Drystar 5302. Be sure to upload the correct ZIP file.
The ZIP file is only available via MEDNET - GSO library - Hardcopy – Dry
Imagers – Drystar 5302 – Freeware

Repair and Service
Caution:
• Depending on the software patch version it might be possible, that
one of the boards gets re-programmed during the software upgrade.
• In case this re-programming is interrupted by power loss, this specific
board may become unusable.
• Do not reboot the printer before requested by the web pages.
3.2 Emergency SW Installation on a new, empty Hard Drive
Purpose This chapter describes the SW Installation on an empty hard drive, e.g. after
exchange of the hard drive.
SW Installation (1) Insert the CF card with the printer

on empty HD "Emergency_Install" software in
the CF card reader
(2) Reboot the printer
(3) At question "Do you want to
preserve config?" select "NO".
Refer to Figure 53.
초
(4) Follow the further instructions on 2
the display.
(5) Select menu "5 Restore 5366_Reg01_017_e.cdr
Configuration" to reload the
previous configuration when Figure 52
finished.
(6) Perform a film calibration from
both trays.
Important remark:
After software installation on a new,
empty harddisk, the printer is only in
the same state than before, if an up-
to-date backup is available.
Emergency SW FOUND
In case the CF card is lost or not ON EXTERNAL CF-card
readable the complete printer setup Install emergency
SW? YES (V) NO (X)
has to be redone.
After Emergency SW Installation on a
new, empty hard disk without Emergency SW Install
"Configuration Restore" the printer is Do you want
to preserve config?
in the same state like it has been YES (V) NO (X)
shipped from factory 536632gc.cdr
(default IP address 169.254.10.10)

Figure 53

Repair and Service
The printer "Emergency_Install" software can be obtained via MEDNET,

GSO Library.
Caution:
• Do not reboot the printer before requested by a local keypad
message
3.3 Emergency SW Installation on a printer in "Error - System Failure"

state
Purpose This chapter describes the SW Installation on a printer in ERROR -

SYSTEM FAILURE state.
Important remark:
The software installation procedure
described here formats the hard
disk.
In case you select "NO" at question Emergency SW FOUND
"Do you want to preserve config" ON EXTERNAL CF-card
Install emergency
the configuration data are erased. SW? YES (V) NO (X)
In this case the printer is only in the
same state than before, if an up-to-
Emergency SW Install
date backup is available. Do you want
In case the CF card is lost or not to preserve config?
YES (V) NO (X)
readable the complete printer setup 536632gc.cdr
has to be redone.
Figure 54

Repair and Service
SW Installation (1) Insert the CF card with the printer

on empty HD "Emergency_Install" software in
the CF card reader
(2) Reboot the printer
(3) At question "Do you want to
preserve config?" select
"NO" in case you want to erase
초
the complete configuration 2
"YES" in case want to keep the
current configuration. Refer to
5366_Reg01_017_e.cdr
Figure 54 and to info below.
(4) Follow the further instructions on Figure 55
the local keypad.
(5) Select menu "5 Restore
Configuration" to reload the
previous configuration when
finished.
The printer "Emergency_Install" software can be obtained via MEDNET,

GSO Library.
Caution:
• Do not reboot the printer before requested by a local keypad
message
When you choose during Emergency SW Installation to preserve the

configuration following steps are executed internally:
1. A backup of the printer configuration data is created and copied to
RAM
2. The software is copied from CF card to hard disk and inflated
3. The boards are programmed
4. The backup is restored from RAM
When you choose during Emergency SW Installation not to preserve the
configuration the configuration data are erased. The printer in this case is in
the same state like it has been shipped from factory
(default IP address 169.254.10.10)

Chapter 3.3
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Troubleshooting
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
► Please note
The Chapter ‘Troubleshooting’, Edition 1, Revision 0, has been replaced by the

separately available Troubleshooting Guide, DD+DIS154.08E.
Please download the Troubleshooting Guide from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Æ Hardcopy Æ Dry Imagers Æ Drystar 5302 Æ Trouble shooting guide
A description of the printer error codes is appended to this document.

Edition 1, Revision 1
08-2008 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 16179549
eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v05
Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Troubleshooting
intentionally left blank


08-2008 Type 5366/100 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
Appendix: Error Catalogue

This document lists all error codes of the printer software version 1.8.0_C2

Revision Date
1.1 03-2007 Revised error catalogue for software 1.8.0_C2.
Replaces error catalogue revision 1.0 of software 1.8.0_C1
Document Title
DD+DIS403.05E Service Bulletin No. 3: Software Release 1.80_C2 available
NOTE:
• The error catalogue is part of the device software (file "error.xml").
It can be extracted from DS5302.zip → errors.jar → error.xml.
• The print-out supplied here is based on software release 1.8.0_C2 (error.xml dated
18. Aug. 2005)

03-2007 printed in Germany eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v02
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
Repair and Service
Troubleshooting DD+DIS150.05E
NOTE:
Depending on attributes for "Type" and "Action" (see error descriptions below)
error messages will be issued as error code with explanatory text or plain text
only:
Type Action Error message will be issued as ……
Defect Replace Message "MODXX* Please replace module"
Defect See manual Message "EXXXXXX – texttext"
Failure None Message "WXXXXXX - texttext"
Accidental None Message "texttext" (e.g. remove film jam)
*List of Modules:
MOD Nr. Spare Part
MOD01 UPPER TRAY W/O TAG
MOD02 LOWER TRAY W/O TAG
MOD03 / MOD04 UPPER / LOWER PICK UP MODULE
MOD05 THERMAL HEAD DS530x
MOD06 OUTPUT MODULE
MOD07 DRUM DRIVE MODULE
MOD08 DEVIL MODULE
MOD09 POWER SUPPLY
MOD10 KEYPAD/DISPLAY MODULE
MOD11 INPUT SENSORS MODULE
MOD12 THEMIS4B W/O SDRAM
MOD13 CAM DRIVE MODULE
MOD14 GEAR BOX & BELT
MOD15 SUSPENSION DRIVE MODULE
MOD16 TPH COOLING FAN _
MOD17 PUMP & VALVES ASSY
MOD18 RAM MODULE
MOD20 VILIS COOLING FAN

Chapter 3.3 / Appendix page 2 Error Catalogue Edition 1, Revision 1

Agfa Company Confidential Drystar 5302 (Type 5366) 03-2006
Repair and Service
MODULE : uppertraymodule
Elabel : No
HC301000 : uppertraymodule.connected
Display XS1 not connected
* Type Defect
* Context 301000
* Action SeeManual
* Reason XS7 or XS8 not connected
Cure1 Connect XS7 or XS8
HC301001 : uppertray.overruled
Display Upper Input Tray Overruled
* Type Failure
* Context 301001
* Action None
* Reason Inputtray overruled (dmax 2.0)
Cure Replace filmpack
HC301003 : uppertraymodule.tagreader
Display RF1 defective
* Type Defect
* Context 301003
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 Tag reader not connected
Cure1 Connect tag reader
* Reason2 Tag reader defect
Cure2 Replace
Part Tag reader
HC301004 : uppertraymodule.s11
Display S11 defective
* Type Failure
* Context 301004
* Action None
* Reason1 S11 not connected
Cure1 Connect S11
* Reason2 Upper tray module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD01

Edition 1, Revision 1 Error Catalogue Chapter 3.3 / Appendix page 3

03-2006 Drystar 5302 (Type 5366) Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
* Type Failure
* Context 301005
* Action None
Cure1 Connect S24
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD01
HC301006 : uppertraymodule.takeoversensors.working
* Type Defect
* Context 301006
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 S11 and S24 not connected
Cure1 Connect S11 and S24
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD01
Display Upper tray empty sensor defect
* Type Defect
* Context 01
* Action Replace
Cure1 Connect S1
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD01
HC301008 : upperrftag.typecode.invalid
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Unsupported film type in upper tray
HC301009 : upperrftag.formatcode.invalid
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Unsupported film format in upper tray


Repair and Service
HC301010 : upperrftag.unsupported.version
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Wrong version in upper tray
HC301011 : upperrftag.signature
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Wrong encryption in upper tray
HC301012 : upperrftag.history.insecure
* Type Defect
* Context 301012
* Action SeeManual
* Reason Tag history corrupt in upper tray
Cure Call service
HC301013 : upperrftag.unreadable
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Unreadable tag in upper tray
HC301014 : upperrftag.count.exceeded
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Film overrun in upper tray
HC301015 : upperrftag.no.filmcount
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Film overrun in upper tray
HC301016 : upper.filmcal.required
* Type Failure
* Context 301016
* Action None
* Reason Upper tray needs calibration
Cure Perform upper tray calibration
HC301017 : upperrftag.collision
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Possible 2 tags in upper tray
Cure Remove lowest tag


Repair and Service
HC301018 : upperTag-unsupported
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Wrong version in upper tray
HC301019 : uppertag.history.insecure
* Type Defect
* Context 301019
* Action SeeManual
* Reason Tag history file corrupt in upper tray
Cure Perform emergency software installation without preserving configuration
NOTE:
In the error.xml on the printer this error lists cure as "Call service"
HC301020 : uppertraymodule.s11.flagproblem
* Type Failure
* Context 301020
* Action None
* Reason S11 defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD01
HC301021 : uppertraymodule.s24.flagproblem
* Type Failure
* Context 301021
* Action None
* Reason S24 defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD01


Repair and Service
MODULE : lowertraymodule
Elabel : No
HC302000 : lowertraymodule.connected
* Type Defect
* Context 302000
* Action SeeManual
* Reason XS9 not connected to lower tray module
Cure1 Connect XS9 to lower tray module
HC302001 : lowertray.overruled
* Type Failure
* Context 302001
* Action None
* Reason Inputtray overruled (dmax 2.0)
HC302003 : lowertraymodule.tagreader
* Type Defect
* Context 302003
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 Tag reader not connected
Cure1 Connect tag reader
* Reason2 Tag reader defect
Cure2 Replace
Part Tag reader
HC302007 : lowertraymodule.s2
* Type Defect
* Context 02
* Action Replace
Cure1 Connect S1
* Reason2 Lower tray module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD02
HC302008 : lowerrftag.typecode.invalid
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Unsupported film type in lower tray


Repair and Service
HC302009 : lowerrftag.formatcode.invalid
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Unsupported film format in lower tray
HC302010 : lowerrftag.unsupported.version
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Wrong version in lower tray
HC302011 : lowerrftag.signature
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Wrong encryption in lower tray
HC302012 : lowerrftag.history.insecure
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Tag history corrupt in lower tray
Cure Call service
HC302013 : lowerrftag.unreadable
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Unreadable tag in lower tray
HC302014 : lowerrftag.count.exceeded
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Film overrun in lower tray
HC302015 : lowerrftag.no.filmcount
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Film overrun in lower tray
HC302016 : lower.filmcal.required
* Type Failure
* Context 302016
* Action None
* Reason Lower tray needs calibration
Cure Perform lower tray calibration


Repair and Service
NOTE:
In the error.xml on the printer this error lists cure falsely as "Perform upper tray calibration"
HC302017 : lowerrftag.collision
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Possible 2 tags in lower tray
Cure Remove lowest tag
HC302018 : lowerTag-unsupported
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Wrong version in lower tray
HC302019 : lowertag.history.insecure
* Type Defect
* Context 302019
* Action SeeManual
* Reason Tag history corrupt in lower tray
Cure Perform emergency software installation without preserving configuration
NOTE:
In the error.xml on the printer this error lists cure as "Call service"
MODULE : upperpickupmodule
Elabel : Yes
HC303000 : upperpickupmodule.film.pickupposition
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Upper input jam
Cure Remove upper input jam


Repair and Service
HC303001 : upperpickupmodule.film.bendposition
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC303002 : upperpickupmodule.film.homeposition
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Upper pickup homing failed accidently
Cure Self resolving accident
HC303003 : upperpickupmodule.film.vacuum
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
NOTE:
If this error occurs also the vacuum tubes, filters and vacuum cups for dirt/dust. Replace vacuum
pump if all parts are clean and the error occurs frequently
HC303004 : upperpickupmodule.filmpickup
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC303005 : upperpickupmodule.s18.low
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC303006 : upperpickupmodule.s18.high
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Internal jam
Cure Remove internal jam


Repair and Service
HC303007 : upperpickupmodule.pickup.skew
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC303008 : upperpickupmodule.tphalign
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC303009 : upperpickupmodule.film.align
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC303010 : upperpickupmodule.homeposition
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Upper pickup homing failed accidently
HC303011 : upperpickupmodule.thpositioning
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC303012 : upperpickupmodule.elabel.present
* Type Failure
* Context 303012
* Action None
* Reason1 Upper pickup elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect upper pickup elabel
* Reason2 Upper pickup Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD03


Repair and Service
HC303013 : upperpickupmodule.elabel.config
* Type Failure
* Context 303013
* Action None
* Reason Upper pickup elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD03
HC303014 : upperpickupmodule.connected
* Type Defect
* Context 303014
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 XS1 disconnected
Cure Connect XS1
* Reason Upper pickup module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD03
HC303015 : upperpickupmodule.working
* Type Defect
* Context 303015
* Action Replace
* Reason1 Upper pickup module defect
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD03
* Reason2 Film wrinkled in upper tray
Cure2 Remove wrinkled film
HC303020 : upperpickupmodule.working
* Type Defect
* Context 03
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD03
NOTE:
This Error code is only available in SW < 1.80_C2
HC303021 : upperpickupmodule.m7.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 03
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD03


Repair and Service
HC303022 : upperpickupmodule.m7.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 03
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD03
HC303023 : upperpickupmodule.s14
* Type Defect
* Context 03
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD03
* Type Defect
* Context 03
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD03
* Type Defect
* Context 03
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD03
MODULE : lowerpickupmodule
Elabel : Yes
HC304000 : lowerpickupmodule.film.pickupposition
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Lower input jam
Cure Remove lower input jam
HC304001 : lowerpickupmodule.film.bendposition
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC304002 : lowerpickupmodule.film.homeposition
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None


Repair and Service
HC304003 : lowerpickupmodule.film.vacuum
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
NOTE:
If this error occurs also the vacuum tubes, filters and vacuum cups for dirt/dust. Replace vacuum
pump if all parts are clean and the error occurs frequently
HC304004 : lowerpickupmodule.filmpickup
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC304005 : lowerpickupmodule.s19.low
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC304006 : lowerpickupmodule.s19.high
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC304007 : lowerpickupmodule.pickup.skew
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None


Repair and Service
HC304008 : lowerpickupmodule.tphalign
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC304009 : lowerpickupmodule.film.align
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC304010 : lowerpickupmodule.homeposition
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC304011 : lowerpickupmodule.thpositioning
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC304012 : lowerpickupmodule.elabel.present
* Type Failure
* Context 304012
* Action None
* Reason1 Lower pickup elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect lower pickup elabel
* Reason2 Lower pickup Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04
HC304013 : lowerpickupmodule.elabel.config
* Type Failure
* Context 304013
* Action None
* Reason Lower pickup elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD04


Repair and Service
HC304014 : lowerpickupmodule.connected
* Type Defect
* Context 304014
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 XS4 disconnected
Cure Connect XS4
* Reason lower pickup module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
HC304015 : lowerpickupmodule.working
* Type Defect
* Context 304015
* Action Replace
* Reason1 Lower pickup module defect
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD04
* Reason2 Film wrinkled in upper tray
Cure2 Remove wrinkled film
HC304020 : lowerpickupmodule.working
* Type Defect
* Context 04
* Action Replace
* Reason Lower pickup module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
NOTE:
This Error code is only available in SW < 1.80_C2
HC304021 : lowerpickupmodule.m6.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 04
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
HC304022 : lowerpickupmodule.m6.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 04
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD04


Repair and Service
HC304023 : lowerpickupmodule.s16
* Type Defect
* Context 04
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
* Type Defect
* Context 04
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
* Type Defect
* Context 04
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
MODULE : thmodule
Elabel : Yes
HC305000 : thmodule.high
* Type Defect
* Context 305000
* Action SeeManual
* Reason Coolingfan defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD16
HC305001 : thmodule.thpos.fail
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
Cure Resolve jam


Repair and Service
HC305002 : thmodule.thermalheadheater
* Type Failure
* Context 305002
* Action None
* Reason1 Connector P3 on PSU not connected
Cure1 Connect P3 on PSU
* Reason2 Connectors P2 and P3 on OSB not connected
Cure2 Connect connectors P2 and P3
* Reason3 Connectors P6 on OSB not connected
Cure3 Connect connector P6
* Reason4 Connector XS6 on heater not connected
Cure4 Connect connector XS6
* Reason5 Sensor S12 defect
Cure5 Replace MOD04
* Reason6 PSU defect
Cure6 Replace
Part MOD08
* Reason7 TH defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD05
HC305003 : thmodule.elabel.present
* Type Failure
* Context 305003
* Action None
* Reason1 TH Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect TH elabel
* Reason2 Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD05
HC305004 : thmodule.elabel.config
* Type Failure
* Context 305004
* Action None
* Reason Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD05


Repair and Service
HC305005 : thmodule.device.current
* Type Defect
* Context 305005
* Action SeeManual
* Reason3 Connectors P3 on TH not connected
Cure3 Connect connector P3 on TH
* Reason4 Connector P2 on TH not connected
* Reason6 Connector P14 on VILIS not connected
Cure6 Connect connector P14 on VILIS
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD08
* Reason8 OSB defect
Cure8 Replace
Part OSB
* Reason9 TH defect
Cure9 Replace
Part MOD04
HC305006 : thmodule.powerlogic
* Type Defect
* Context 305006
* Action SeeManual
Cure5 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure6 Replace
Part OSB
* Reason7 TH defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD05


Repair and Service
HC305007 : thmodule.headvoltageactuator
* Type Defect
* Context 305007
* Action SeeManual
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure8 Replace
Part OSB
* Reason9 TH defect
Cure9 Replace
Part MOD05
HC305008 : thmodule.osb.connected
* Type Defect
* Context 305008
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 P1 on OSB not connected
Cure1 Connect P1 on OSB
* Reason2 P1 on VILIS not connected
Cure2 Connect P1 on VILIS
Cure3 Replace
Part OSB
HC305009 : thmodule.thermalheadheating
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason TH module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD04


Repair and Service
HC305010 : thmodule.voltage.low
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action SeeManual
* Reason TH module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
HC305011 : thmodule.thinstall
* Type Failure
* Context 305011
* Action None
* Reason TBD
Cure TBD
HC305020 : thmodule.device.resistors
* Type Defect
* Context 05
* Action Replace
* Reason1 TBD
Cure1 TBD
Part TBD
* Reason2 TH module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04
HC305021 : thmodule.device.thermistors
* Type Defect
* Context 05
* Action Replace
* Reason5 TH defect
Cure5 Replace
Part MOD05


Repair and Service
MODULE : outputmodule
Elabel : Yes
HC306000 : outputmodule.connected
* Type Defect
* Context 306000
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 XS2 not connected
Cure1 Connect XS2
Cure2 Connect XS3
HC306001 : outputmodule.cdm.init
* Type Failure
* Context 306001
* Action None
* Reason Output module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306002 : outputmodule.intensity.scan
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Internal film jam
Cure Remove film jam
HC306003 : outputmodule.outputsensor.hi
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Output film jam
HC306004 : outputmodule.printingFail
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC306005 : outputmodule.film.scan
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
Cure Remove jam


Repair and Service
HC306006 : outputmodule.outputSensor.lo
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC306007 : outputmodule.outputorscan.fail
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC306008 : outputmodule.outputhome.fail
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC306009 : outputmodule.cdmhome.fail
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC306010 : outputmodule.elabel.present
* Type Failure
* Context 306010
* Action None
* Reason1 Output elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect output elabel
* Reason2 Output elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
HC306011 : outputmodule.elabel.config
* Type Failure
* Context 306011
* Action None
* Reason Output elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD06


Repair and Service
HC306012 : outputmodule.cdm.home
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason CDM homing accidently failed
HC306013 : outputmodule.home
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Output homing accidently failed
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306014 : outputmodule.cdminstall
* Type Failure
* Context 306014
* Action None
* Reason CDM needs calibration
Cure Calibrate CDM
HC306020 : outputmodule.working
* Type Defect
* Context 06
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306021 : outputmodule.m4.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 06
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306022 : outputmodule.m4.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 06
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06


Repair and Service
HC306023 : outputmodule.cdm.m5.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 06
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306024 : outputmodule.cdm.m5.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 06
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306025 : outputmodule.s5
* Type Defect
* Context 06
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306026 : outputmodule.s6
* Type Defect
* Context 06
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306027 : outputmodule.cdm.s10
* Type Defect
* Context 06
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306028 : outputmodule.cdm.working
* Type Defect
* Context 06
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06


Repair and Service
MODULE : drumdrivemodule
Elabel : No
HC307001 : drumdrivemodule.m1.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 307001
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 M1 not connected
Cure1 Connect M1
* Reason2 Drum drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07
HC307002 : drumdrivemodule.s9
* Type Defect
* Context 307002
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect S9
* Reason2 Drum drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07
HC307004 : drumdrivemodule.move
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Drum drive move failed accidently
Cure Selfresolving accident
HC307020 : drumdrivemodule.working
* Type Defect
* Context 07
* Action Replace
* Reason Drum drive module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD07
HC307021 : drumdrivemodule.m1.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 07
* Action Replace
* Reason Drum drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07


Repair and Service
MODULE : devilmodule
Elabel : Yes
HC308000 : devilmodule.dsh.connected
* Type Defect
* Context 308000
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 Connector P9 not connected
Cure1 Connect P9
* Reason2 Devil module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC308001 : devilmodule.psu.connected
* Type Defect
* Context 308001
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P15
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC308002 : devilmodule.keypad.connected
* Type Defect
* Context 308002
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P8
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC308003 : devilmodule.th.connected
* Type Defect
* Context 308003
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 Ambient temperatur < 15° at boot-up
Cure1 Install printer in room with temperatur > 15°C ambient temperature
Cure2 Connect P14
Cure3 Connect P1 on TH
Cure4 Replace
Part MOD08
* Reason5 TH defect
Cure5 Replace
Part MOD05


Repair and Service
HC308004 : devilmodule.p21.connected
* Type Defect
* Context 308004
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P2
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
* Type Defect
* Context 308005
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P20
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
* Type Defect
* Context 308006
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P41
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
* Type Defect
* Context 308007
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P40
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
* Type Defect
* Context 308008
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 Connector P1 not connected on Devil
Cure1 Connect P1 on Devil
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08


Repair and Service
HC308009 : devilmodule.elabel.present
* Type Failure
* Context 308009
* Action None
* Reason1 Devil Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect Devil elabel
* Reason2 Devil Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC208010 : devilmodule.elabel.config
* Type Failure
* Context 208010
* Action None
* Reason Devil Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC308011 : devilmodule.power.3v3
* Type Defect
* Context 308011
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD08
* Reason2 PSU module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC308012 : devilmodule.power.12v
* Type Defect
* Context 308012
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC308013 : devilmodule.power.n12v
* Type Defect
* Context 308013
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC308014 : devilmodule.power.24v
* Type Defect
* Context 308014
* Action SeeManual


Repair and Service
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC308015 : devilmodule.power.actuator
* Type Defect
* Context 308015
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC308016 : devilmodule.headvoltage
* Type Defect
* Context 308016
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 Connector P1 not connected on TH
Cure1 Connect P1 on TH
Cure2 Connect P14 on MEC
Cure4 Replace
Part MOD09
Cure5 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure6 Replace
Part MOD05
HC208017 : duplicate.ipaddress
* Type Failure
* Context 208017
* Action None
* Reason IP adress already in use
Cure Change IP adress


Repair and Service
HC312000 : themis.temperature
* Type Defect
* Context 312000
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 Ambient temperature too high what could be caused by continuous
printing in an already warm environment or the environment
temperature is just too high
Cure1 If caused by continuous printing , this can be cured by waiting until
temperature comes down ; otherwise it has to be made sure that the
environment temperature comes down
* Reason2 Cooling of Themis CPU board not efficient because of blocked airflow
Cure2 Make sure that enough airflow is available for the Themis CPU board
by insuring that air inlets and outlets are completely free
* Reason3 Defect CPU on Themis
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD12
HC308024 : devilmodule.serialadc
* Type Defect
* Context 08
* Action Replace
* Reason Devil module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC308025 : devilmodule.bitgenerator
* Type Defect
* Context 08
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC308026 : devilmodule.m16
* Type Defect
* Context 08
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC308027 : devilmodule.fpga
* Type Defect
* Context 08
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08


Repair and Service
HC308028 : devilmodule.m2.driver
* Type Defect
* Context 08
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
* Type Defect
* Context 08
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
* Type Defect
* Context 08
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
* Type Defect
* Context 08
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC308032 : devilmodule.f1.driver
* Type Defect
* Context 08
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC308033 : devilmodule.f2.driver
* Type Defect
* Context 08
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08


Repair and Service
HC312020 : devilmodule.themis.cpuboard
* Type Defect
* Context 12
* Action Replace
* Reason Themis module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD12
HC312021 : devilmodule.themis.serial
* Type Defect
* Context 12
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD12
HC312022 : devilmodule.themis.ethernet
* Type Defect
* Context 12
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part Themis
HC312023 : devilmodule.themis.portex
* Type Defect
* Context 12
* Action Replace
* Reason Software problem
Cure Reinstall software
HC312024 : devilmodule.themis.pci
* Type Defect
* Context 12
* Action Replace
* Reason Themis defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD12
HC318020 : devilmodule.themis.ram
* Type Defect
* Context 18
* Action Replace
* Reason1 RAM defect
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD18
* Reason2 Themis defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD12
HC312025 : devilmodule.themis.clock
* Type Defect
* Context 12
* Action Replace
* Reason Themis defect
Cure Replace


Repair and Service
Part MOD12
MODULE : powersupplymodule
Elabel : Yes
HC309000 : powersupplymodule.temperature
* Type Defect
* Context 309000
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 PSU too hot
Cure1 Switch off printer and let it cool down
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC309001 : powersupplymodule.elabel.present
* Type Failure
* Context 309001
* Action None
* Reason1 PSU Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect VILIS elabel
* Reason2 PSU module Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC309002 : powersupplymodule.elabel.config
* Type Failure
* Context 309002
* Action None
* Reason PSU module Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD09
HC309003 : powersupplymodule.powerth.current
* Type Defect
* Context 309003
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 TH power cables short circuited
Cure1 Check TH power cables
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD05
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD09
HC309004 : powersupplymodule.powermotor.current
* Type Defect
* Context 309004
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 Actuators power cables short circuited
Cure1 Check actuators power cables
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09


Repair and Service
HC309020 : powersupplymodule.powerth
* Type Defect
* Context 09
* Action Replace
* Reason PSU module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD09
HC309022 : powersupplymodule.powermotor
* Type Defect
* Context 09
* Action Replace
* Reason1 Actuators power cables short circuited
Cure1 Check actuators power cables
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC309024 : powersupplymodule.powerlogic
* Type Defect
* Context 09
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD09
HC309025 : powersupplymodule.power3v3
* Type Defect
* Context 09
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD09


Repair and Service
HC309026 : powersupplymodule.power12v
* Type Defect
* Context 09
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD09
HC309027 : powersupplymodule.powern12v
* Type Defect
* Context 09
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD09
MODULE : displaykeypadmodule
Elabel : Yes
HC310000 : displaykeypadmodule.elabel.present
* Type Failure
* Context 310000
* Action None
* Reason1 Display Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect Display elabel
* Reason2 Display Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD10
HC310001 : displaykeypadmodule.elabel.config
* Type Failure
* Context 310001
* Action None
* Reason Display Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
MODULE : inputsensormodule
Elabel : No
HC311000 : inputsensormodule.s4.flagproblem
* Type Failure
* Context 311000
* Action None
Cure Remove jam


Repair and Service
HC311001 : inputsensormodule.s11.flagproblem
* Type Failure
* Context 311001
* Action None
Cure Remove jam
HC311002 : inputsensormodule.connected
* Type Defect
* Context 311002
* Action SeeManual
* Reason XS5 not connected
Cure Connect XS5
HC311003 : inputsensormodule.s4
* Type Failure
* Context 311003
* Action None
Cure1 Connect S4
* Reason2 S4 bracket module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD11
HC311004 : inputsensormodule.s13
* Type Failure
* Context 311004
* Action None
Cure1 Connect S13
* Reason2 S4 bracket module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD11
HC311020 : inputsensormodule.working
* Type Defect
* Context 11
* Action Replace
* Reason S4 bracket module is defective
Cure Power off printer and replace
Part MOD10


Repair and Service
MODULE : camdrivemodule
Elabel : No
HC313000 : camdrivemodule.home
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC313001 : camdrivemodule.m2.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 313001
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 Motor M2 not connected
Cure1 Connect motor M2
* Reason2 Cam shaft module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD13
HC313002 : camdrivemodule.s7
* Type Defect
* Context 313002
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 Sensor S7 not connected
Cure1 Connect sensor S7
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD13
HC313020 : camdrivemodule.working
* Type Defect
* Context 13
* Action Replace
* Reason Cam shaft module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD13
HC313021 : camdrivemodule.m2.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 13
* Action Replace
* Reason Cam shaft module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD13


Repair and Service
MODULE : gearboxmodule
Elabel : No
HC314000 : gearboxmodule.home
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC314001 : gearboxmodule.pickup.passed
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC314002 : gearboxmodule.takeover.film.close
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC314003 : gearboxmodule.film.inputsensors
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
HC314004 : gearboxmodule.m8.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 314004
* Action SeeManual
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD14
NOTE:
In the error.xml on the printer this error lists cure falsely as "Connect motor M2"


Repair and Service
HC314005 : gearboxmodule.s3
* Type Defect
* Context 314005
* Action SeeManual
* Reason2 Roller drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD14
HC314020 : gearboxmodule.working
* Type Defect
* Context 14
* Action Replace
* Reason Roller drive module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD14
HC314021 : gearboxmodule.m8.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 14
* Action Replace
* Reason Roller drive module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD14
MODULE : suspensiondrivemodule
Elabel : No
HC315000 : suspensiondrivemodule.move
* Type Accidental
* Context
* Action None
* Reason Suspension move (10 or 14 inch) failed accidently
HC315001 : suspensiondrivemodule.m3.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 315001
* Action SeeManual
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD15


Repair and Service
HC315002 : suspensiondrivemodule.s21
* Type Defect
* Context 315002
* Action SeeManual
* Reason2 Suspension drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD15
HC315003 : suspensiondrivemodule.s22
* Type Defect
* Context 315003
* Action SeeManual
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD15
HC315020 : suspensiondrivemodule.working
* Type Defect
* Context 15
* Action Replace
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD15
HC315021 : suspensiondrivemodule.m3.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 15
* Action SeeManual
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD15
MODULE : coolingfanmodule
Elabel : No
HC316000 : coolingfanmodule.thf1.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 316020
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 Coolingfan not connected
Cure1 Connect coolingfan
* Reason2 Coolingfan module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD12


Repair and Service
HC316020 : coolingfanmodule.thf1.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 16
* Action Replace
* Reason1 Coolingfan not connected
Cure1 Connect coolingfan
* Reason2 Coolingfan module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD12
MODULE : pumpandvalvesmodule
Elabel : No
HC317000 : pumpandvalvesmodule.m9.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 317000
* Action SeeManual
Cure2 Connect XS10
* Reason3 Pump and valves module defect
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD17
HC317001 : pumpandvalvesmodule.v1.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 317001
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect XS10
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD17
HC317002 : pumpandvalvesmodule.v2.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 317002
* Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect XS10
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD17


Repair and Service
HC317020 : pumpandvalvesmodule.m9.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 17
* Action Replace
* Reason Pump and valves module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD17
HC317021 : pumpandvalvesmodule.v1.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 17
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD17
HC317022 : pumpandvalvesmodule.v2.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 17
* Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD17
MODULE : eboxfanmodule
Elabel : No
HC320000 : eboxfanmodule.eboxfan.connection
* Type Defect
* Context 312000
* Action SeeManual
* Reason1 EBox fan module not connected
Cure1 Connect EBox fan module
* Reason2 EBox fan module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD20
HC320020 : eboxfanmodule.eboxfan.shortcircuit
* Type Defect
* Context 20
* Action Replace
* Reason EBox fan module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD20


Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Electrical and mechanical codings, fuse tables and LED’s
Chapter 3.4:
List of contents
1 Codings................................................................................. 1
1.1 Jumper Setting 73 GB Maxtor Hard Disk ........................................... 1
1.2 Jumper Setting 73 GB Hitachi Hard Disk ........................................... 2
2 Fuses..................................................................................... 3
3 LEDs ...................................................................................... 3
3.1 DEVIL Board ......................................................................................... 3
3.2 THEMIS Board (plugged into the DEVIL Board) ................................ 4
3.3 Power Supply ....................................................................................... 5
3.4 Front Panel ........................................................................................... 6
3.5 Rear panel............................................................................................. 7

Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 3.4 / I
Repair and Service
1 Codings
1.1 Jumper Setting 73 GB Maxtor Hard Disk
1 J1 J3
1
12
18
536634BD.CDR
Figure 1
Jumper J1 Setting Function

1-2 open ID Bit 3
3-4 open ID Bit 2
5-6 open ID Bit 1
7-8 open ID Bit 0
9-10 open Not used
11-12 open Termination Power
Table 1
Jumper J3 Setting Function

1-2 open ID Bit 3
3-4 open ID Bit 2
5-6 open ID Bit 1
7-8 open ID Bit 0
9-10 open Busy LED
11-12 open Enable write protect
13-14 open enable stagger spin
15-16 open Enable delay spin
17-18 open Force single ended bus mode
Table 2

Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 3.4 / 1
Repair and Service
Electrical and mechanical codings, fuse tables and LED’s DD+DIS150.05E
1.2 Jumper Setting 73 GB Hitachi Hard Disk

24
C3
12
1
C4
536634BC.CDR
Figure 2
Jumper C3 Setting Function

1-2 open ID Bit 3
3-4 open ID Bit 2
5-6 open ID Bit 1
7-8 open ID Bit 0
9-10 open Disable Autostart
11-12 open Force single ended bus mode
13-14 open Enable delayed start
15-16 open Write Protect
17-18 open Reserved
19-20 open Reserved
21-22 open LED
23-24 open Term Power to SCSI bus
Table 3
Jumper C4 Setting Function

1-2 open ID Bit 3
3-4 open ID Bit 2
5-6 open ID Bit 1
7-8 open ID Bit 0
9-10 open Not used
11-12 open Write Protect
Table 4

Chapter 3.4 / 2 Drystar 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
Repair and Service
2 Fuses
The printer has no fuses that can be replaced.
If one of the fuses in the power supply is defective, the whole Power supply
unit must be replaced - refer to section 3.5.
3 LEDs
The following tables show the status of the LED indications and the
corresponding function:
LED's on... Refer to

DEVIL Board 3.1
THEMIS Board 3.2
Power supply 3.3
Front Panel 3.4
Rear Panel 3.5
3.1 DEVIL Board
Name Led Color Function

(**) NTRAFFIC D1 yellow Network activity
(**) NGOOD_LINK D2 yellow Network connected
(**) 100MBit_speed
D3 yellow High speed network
IMGCTRL_0 D4 yellow Software controllable
D5 green +3.3V present
NOT present D6
NOT present D7
NOT present D8
D9 green +24V present
NOT present D11
IMGCTRL_CONFDONE D12 yellow Off: FPGA config done.
ON: FPGA not
configured
IMGCTRL_1 D13 yellow Software controllable
UP_LED0 D14 yellow Software controllable
UP_LED1 D15 yellow Software controllable
(**) IDE_DASP D16 yellow IDE activity
D17 green -12V present
CP_ACTLED D19 yellow Disc activity controlled
by PORTEX
Legend : (**) are LEDs situated at the rear panel (refer to 3.5).

Repair and Service
3.2 THEMIS Board (plugged into the DEVIL Board)

D1 yellow Software controllable
V25 D2 green 2.5 for MPC107 host bridge and
FPGA
VCORE D3 green CPU core voltage
CS1 D4 yellow Chip select for portX bus
V33 D5 green 3.3V for most logic on board
FPGA D6 red FPGA configuration done
If FPGA NOT configured => ALARM
VCC D8 green 5V for remaining logic on board
CS0 D9 yellow Chip select for portX bus
CPU D11 yellow CPU Bis Grant - indicates CPU
activity on the Bus

Repair and Service
3.3 Power Supply
536634ab.cdr
Figure 3
LED Status Color Function

Overtemp On Red Temperature inside power supply
exceeded permissible limits. Operation
not possible*.
Off Temperature inside power supply
within permissible limit.
+ 3.3 V On Green +3.3 V present
Off +3.3 V not present
+5V On Green +5 V present
Off +5 V not present
+12 V On Green +12 V present
-12 V On Green -12 V present
Off -12 V not present
+24 V On Green +24 V present
13..27 V On Green voltage between 13 V and 27 V
Off voltage < 13 V
*When the temperature inside the power supply exceeds the permissible limit,
printing can continue for up to 120 seconds. After this delay the power supply
switches off the power and checks the temperature every 20 seconds. As
soon as the temperature is below the permissible limit, it switches on again.

Repair and Service
3.4 Front Panel
Led Color Function

D1 green 12V power present
D2..D25 green / red See table below
D3 green 5V power present
Color Light Status Receive Printing

Jobs ? possible ?
Ready No No
Constant
(stand-by)
Startup No No
sequence
Receiving jobs Yes Yes
Green
Calculating Yes Yes
Blinking
Printing Yes Yes
Calibrating Yes No
Installation No No
Key-operator Yes/No Yes/No
Service mode No No
Blinking Film jam Yes No
Red
Warning Yes Yes
Constant Error status No No

Repair and Service
3.5 Rear panel
536634aa.cdr
Figure 4

NTRAFFIC D1 yellow Network activity
NGOOD_LINK D2 yellow Network connected
100MBit_speed D3 yellow High speed network
IDE_DASP D16 yellow IDE activity
Note: These LEDs are part of the DEVIL board (refer to 3.1).

Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Replacements
List of Contents
1 Upper Tray (MOD01) Replacement......................................... 3

2 Lower Tray (MOD02) Replacement......................................... 5
3 Pickup Module (MOD03/04) Replacement ............................. 7
4 TPH Module (MOD05) Replacement ....................................... 9
5 Output Module (MOD06) Replacement ................................ 12
6 Drum Drive Module (MOD07) ................................................ 14
7 Devil Module (MOD08) Replacement.................................... 17
8 Power Supply Module (MOD09) Replacement .................... 20
9 Display Module (MOD10) Replacement ............................... 23
10 Input Sensor Module (MOD11) Replacement ...................... 25
11 Themis Module (MOD12) Replacement................................ 28
12 Cam drive (MOD13) Replacement ........................................ 31
13 Gear Box Module (MOD14) Replacement ............................ 33
14 Suspension Drive Module (MOD15) Replacement .............. 35
15 TPH cooling fan (MOD16) Replacement .............................. 38
16 Pumps & Valves Assembly (MOD17) Replacement ............ 40
17 RAM Module (MOD18) Replacement .................................... 42
18 E-Box Cooling Fan (MOD20) Replacement.......................... 45
19 Cam Drive Shaft Replacement.............................................. 47
20 Devil/Themis/RAM Module Replacement............................. 51
21 Hard Disk Drive Replacement............................................... 54
22 Main Drive Pulley & Belt Replacement ................................ 57
23 OSB Module Replacement .................................................... 59
24 Print Drum Module Replacement ......................................... 62
25 Tag Reader Assembly Replacement .................................... 67
26 TPH Filter Module Replacement ........................................... 69


Repair and Service
1 Upper Tray (MOD01) Replacement
Required Spare Part, Tools & Time 1 Pull out and lift the tray to take it out
2
1
5366QRM01 5366QRM10
3 Remove tag reader, cable, cable holder

2 Take out films and turn tray
and EMI shield
2
3
1
4
5
1
3
5366QRM03 5366QRM04
4 Mount tag reader, cable, cable holder

5 Insert tray and load films
and EMI shield
2 1
3
4
5366QRM05 5366QRM11


Repair and Service
Replacements DD+DIS150.05E
6 Print a SMPTE testimage 7 Check image quality
1. Press the Key-operator key

2. Scroll down to “Print Image”
3. Press the Confirm key
4. Press the Confirm key to select “testimage”
5. Scroll down to “smpte_lin.zip”
7. Press the Confirm key to select one copy
SELECT CA
Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM07 5366QRM08
8 Your Drystar 5302 is ready to use
5366QRM09


Repair and Service
2 Lower Tray (MOD02) Replacement
2
1
5366QRM01 5366QRM02
3 Remove tag reader, cable, cable holder

2 Take out films and turn tray
and EMI shield
2
3
1
4
5
1
3
5366QRM03 5366QRM04
4 Mount tag reader, cable, cable holder

5 Insert ray and load films
and EMI shield
2 1
3
4
5366QRM05 5366QRM06


Repair and Service
6 Print SMPTE testimage 7 Check image quality

SELECT CA
Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM07 5366QRM08
5366QRM09


Repair and Service
3 Pickup Module (MOD03/04) Replacement

1 Pull out upper or lower tray and lift the
Required Spare Part, Tools & Time
tray to take it out
2
1
5366QRM15 5366QRM02
3 Insert new Pickup Module, insert and

2 Pull out pickup module
close tray
1 1
5366QRM12 5366QRM14

SELECT CA
Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM07


Repair and Service
5366QRM08


Repair and Service
4 TPH Module (MOD05) Replacement
Required Spare Part, Tools & Time 1 Print a SMPTE testimage

SELECT CA
Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM35 5366QRM07
2 Switch off and disconnect all cables 3 Open the top cover
5366QRM16 5366QRM36
5 Open the hold-down bracket and unplug

4 Caution: The Thermal Head can be hot!
the two connectors 2 and 3
2 3
5366QRM37 5366QRM38


Repair and Service
6 Open the TPH unit. Disconnect

7 Take out TPH unit
connectors 3 to 5 and loosen screws A
4
3
A
5366QRM39 5366QRM40
8 Pack SMPTE film, defective TPH 9 Insert new TPH, fasten screws A and
and fill in forms connect connectors 3 to 5
5 6 A
1
Waybill 4 5
Sender:
Return
John Smith
Label
Receiver:
Agfa SN:SN: 1234 3 4 3 A
Part:
Part: TPH
5366QRM41 5366QRM42
10 Close TPH, connect connectors 3 and 4

11 Close the top cover
and close hold down bracket
2
1
3 4
5366QRM43 5366QRM44


Repair and Service
12 Connect cables and switch on 13 Perform a film calibration
3 4 WARMING UP
Please Wait 1. Press the Key-operator key
2. Scroll down to “Film calibration”
5 Ready 3. Press the Confirm key
1 Film calibration CA
2 2 Therm. Head clean.
5366QRM23 5366QRM34
15 In case blank frame < 2 mm call service

14 Print a SMPTE testimage
or refer to Tech. Doc. Chap. 3.6

= 2 mm = 2 mm
If < 2 mm
7. Press the Confirm key to select one copy Call Service or
SELECT CA Tech. Doc. Chap. 3.6
Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM07 5366QRM33
16 Check image quality 17 Your Drystar 5302 is ready to use
5366QRM08 5366QRM09


Repair and Service
5 Output Module (MOD06) Replacement
Required Spare Part, Tools & Time 1 Switch off and disconnect all cables
5365QRM63 5365QRM16
3 Remove connectors and 2 screws.

2 Open top cover
Remove Output Tray. Lift out module.
3
2
5365QRM36 5365QRM64
5 Insert new module, re-connect

4 Pack defective module and fill in forms
connectors and fasten 2 screws
5 6
2
1 1
3
2 2
Waybill 4
Sender:
John Smith 4
Receiver: 3
AgfaSN:SN: 1234
Part:
Part: TPH
5365QRM65 5365QRM66


Repair and Service
6 Close top cover 7 Connect cables and switch on
3 4 WARMING UP
Please Wait
5 Ready
5365QRM44 5365QRM23
8 Perform CDM calibration 9 Print a SMPTE testimage

Drystar 5302 Webpages
Service Engineer Tools 4. Press the Confirm key to select “testimage”
Enter Service Command Session 6. Press the Confirm key
6 Calibration SELECT CA
Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
2 Internal Densitometer Calibration
4 smpte_lin.zip
5365QRM34 5365QRM07
5365QRM08 5365QRM09


Repair and Service
6 Drum Drive Module (MOD07)
5366QRM24 5366QRM16
2 Open top cover and remove left cover 3 Remove belt and pulley
1 3
2
2
1
3
5366QRM25 5366QRM26
4 Disconnect 2 connectors and open 5 Remove 3 screws and remove drum

cable holder drive module.
3
2
2
1
1 1
5366QRM27 5366QRM28


Repair and Service
6 Put new drum drive module in place and 7 Re-connect 2 connectors, close cable
mount 3 screws holder.
3
1
1
2
2 2
5366QRM29 5366QRM30
9 Mount the side cover and close top

8 Mount new pulley and new belt
cover
1
3
2
4
2
5
1
3
5366QRM31 5366QRM32
10 Connect cables and switch on 11 Print a SMPTE testimage
3 4 WARMING UP
Please Wait
5 Ready 4. Press the Confirm key to select “testimage”
2 7. Press the Confirm key to select one copy
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM23 5366QRM07


Repair and Service
5366QRM08 5366QRM09


Repair and Service
7 Devil Module (MOD08) Replacement
SW 7
2
5366QRM95 5366QRM16
2 Open top cover and remove right cover 3 Remove the EMI shield
3 1
5366QRM17 5366QRM87
4 At touching the Vilis / Themis / RAM 5 Unplug all connectors at the Devil
module observe ESD precautions module
5366QRM88 5366QRM96


Repair and Service
7 Remove 2 screws A. Remove Devil

6 Remove 4 screws. Remove Themis
Module
1
1
5366QRM106a 5366QRM97a
8 Pack defective Devil

9 Mount the new Devil CPU
Module and fill in forms
5 6
1
2
Waybill 4
Sender:
John Smith 2
Receiver: 3
AgfaSN:SN: 1234
Part:
Part: TPH 2
5366QRM99 5366QRM10a
10 Mount Themis PCB with RAM 11 Re-connect all connectors
5366QRM106 5366QRM102


Repair and Service

12 Mount the EMI shield
cover
1 1
5366QRM94 5366QRM22

3 4 WARMING UP
Please Wait 2. Scroll down to “Print Image”
5 Ready
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM23 5366QRM07
5366QRM08 5366QRM09


Repair and Service
8 Power Supply Module (MOD09) Replacement
5366QRM86 5366QRM16
3 1
5366QRM17 5366QRM87
4 At touching the Devil module observe

5 Unplug connectors 1 to 4
ESD precautions
5366QRM88 5366QRM89


Repair and Service
7 Pack defective Power Supply

6 Remove the power supply
5 6
1
2
1 Waybill 4
2 1 Sender:
John Smith
1 Receiver: 3
AgfaSN:SN: 1234
Part:
Part: TPH
1
5366QRM90 5366QRM91
8 Put new power supply in place. Connect

9 Re-connect connectors 1 to 3
the E-label connector. Mount 5 screws.
1 3
3
3
2
3
5366QRM92 5366QRM93

cover
1
1
5366QRM94 5366QRM22


Repair and Service

3 4 WARMING UP
5 Ready
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM23 5366QRM07
5366QRM08 5366QRM09


Repair and Service
9 Display Module (MOD10) Replacement
5366QRM116 5366QRM16
3 Unplug connectors and remove

2 Open top cover and remove right cover
display module
1
1
2
2
4
3 3
5366QRM17 5366QRM117
4 When touching the new display 5 Mount new display module and
module observe ESD precautions connect cables
3
1
5366QRM119


Repair and Service

7 Connect cables and switch on
cover
3 4 WARMING UP
Please Wait
3
5 Ready
2
2
1
1
5366QRM22 5366QRM23

SELECT CA
Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM07 5366QRM08
5366QRM09


Repair and Service
10 Input Sensor Module (MOD11) Replacement
5365QRM154 5365QRM16
2 Open top cover and remove right cover 3 Open hold down bracket
5365QRM17 5366QRM48
5 Disconnet cable, remove screw and pull

4 Open TPH module
out input sensor module
1
2
5366QRM49 5365QRM156


Repair and Service
6 Insert new input sensor module, mount 7 Close TPH module and hold down
screw and connect cable bracket
2 3
5365QRM155 5366QRM59

cover
3 4 WARMING UP
Please Wait
3
5 Ready
2
2
1
1
5365QRM83 5365QRM84

SELECT CA
Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5365QRM22 5365QRM23


Repair and Service
5365QRM07


Repair and Service
11 Themis Module (MOD12) Replacement
SW 7
2
5366QRM103 5366QRM16
3 1
5366QRM17 5366QRM87
4 At touching the Devil / Themis / RAM

5 Remove RAM module
module observe ESD precautions
1
2
5366QRM88 5366QRM114


Repair and Service
7 Pack defective Themis

6 Remove 4 screws. Remove Themis
5 6
1
2
Waybill 4
Sender:
John Smith
Receiver: 3
AgfaSN:SN: 1234
Part:
Part: TPH
5366QRM106a 5366QRM105
8 Mount Themis at Devil CPU 9 Remount RAM module
5366QRM106 5366QRM115

cover
1
1


Repair and Service

3 4 WARMING UP
5 Ready
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM23 5366QRM07
5366QRM08 5366QRM09


Repair and Service
12 Cam drive (MOD13) Replacement
5365QRM78 5365QRM16
2 Open top cover and remove right cover 3 Open cable holder
2
1
5365QRM17 5365QRM79
4 Disconnect connctor 1, remove two 5 Put new module in place, fasten 2

screws and remove cam drive module screws and connect cable
2
1
3
2 2
1 3
1
5365QRM80 5365QRM81


Repair and Service

6 Reconnect cable holder
cover
2
1
5365QRM82 5365QRM83

3 4 WARMING UP
5 Ready
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5365QRM84 5365QRM22
5365QRM23 5365QRM07


Repair and Service
13 Gear Box Module (MOD14) Replacement
5366QRM15 5366QRM16
2 Open top cover and remove right cover 3 Remove spring, belt and connector
3 1
3
2
5366QRM17 5366QRM18
4 Loosen 3 screws A and remove gear box 5 Put new gear box module in place.
module Fasten 3 screws
2
1 3
1 3
1 3
5366QRM19 5366QRM20


Repair and Service
6 Re-connect connector, mount belt and 7 Re-mount right cover and close top
spring cover
3 2
1 2
1
5366QRM21 5366QRM22
8 Re-Connect all cables and switch on 9 Print a SMPTE testimage

3 4 WARMING UP
5 Ready
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM23 5366QRM07
5366QRM08 5366QRM09


Repair and Service
14 Suspension Drive Module (MOD15) Replacement
5366QRM68 5366QRM16
2 Open top cover and remove left cover 3 Remove right cover
1
1
2
3 2
5366QRM25 5366QRM17a
4 Remove output module and output tray 5 Remove rear cover
1
2
3
2 2
5366QRM64 5366QRM70a


Repair and Service
7 Disconnect cable, remove 3 screws and

6 Remove spring
remove module
3
2 1
2
5366QRM71 5366QRM72
8 Put new module in place, fasten 3

9 Remount spring
screws A and re-connect cable
2 3
2
5366QRM73 5366QRM74
10 Remount rear cover 11 Remount output module
2
2
1
1 3
2
4
5366QRM75a 5366QRM66


Repair and Service
13 Remount left cover and close top

12 Remount right cover
cover
3
2
2
1 1
5366QRM17b 5366QRM32
14 Reconnect all cables and switch on 15 Print SMPTE image

3 4 WARMING UP
5 Ready
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM23 5366QRM07
16 Check image quality 17Your Drystar 5302 is ready to use
5366QRM08 5366QRM09


Repair and Service
15 TPH cooling fan (MOD16) Replacement
5365QRM67 5365QRM16
3 Remove connector A and 2 screws. Lift

2 Open top cover
out module.
2
3
2
A
1
5365QRM36 5365QRM47
4 Insert new module, re-connect

5 Close top cover
connector and fasten 2 screws
2
1
2
A
3
5365QRM60 5365QRM44


Repair and Service

3 4 WARMING UP
5 Ready
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5365QRM23 5365QRM23
5365QRM08 5365QRM09


Repair and Service
16 Pumps & Valves Assembly (MOD17) Replacement
SW7 2
5366QRM142 5366QRM16
2 Open top cover and remove left cover 3 Remove 3 screws, 2 hoses and cable
3
1
2
2
1
1 1
3
5366QRM25 5366QRM143
4 Put new module in place, mount 3

5 Remount left cover and close top cover
screws, cable and hoses
3
3
2
2
1
1 1
1
5366QRM144 5366QRM32


Repair and Service
6 Reconnect all cables and switch on 7 Print SMPTE image

3 4 WARMING UP
5 Ready
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM23 5366QRM07
8 Evaluate test image 9 Your Drystar 5302 is ready to use
5366QRM08 5366QRM09


Repair and Service
17 RAM Module (MOD18) Replacement
5366QRM113 5366QRM16
3 1
5366QRM17 5366QRM87
4 At touching the Devil / Themis / RAM

5 Remove RAM module
module observe ESD precautions
1
2
5366QRM88 5366QRM114


Repair and Service
6 Mount new RAM Module 7 Mount the EMI shield
5366QRM115 5366QRM94

cover
3 4 WARMING UP
Please Wait
3
5 Ready
2
2
1
1
5366QRM22 5366QRM23

SELECT CA
Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM07 5366QRM08


Repair and Service
5366QRM09


Repair and Service
18 E-Box Cooling Fan (MOD20) Replacement
SW 7
2
5366QRM107 5366QRM16
3 1
5366QRM17 5366QRM87
4 Open cable holder, disconnect 5 Re-mount 2 screws, re-connect

connector and remove 2 screws connector and close cable holder.
3 1
2 2
1 3
5366QRM108 5366QRM109


Repair and Service

cover
1 1
5366QRM94 5366QRM22

3 4 WARMING UP
5 Ready
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM23 5366QRM07
5366QRM08 5366QRM09


Repair and Service
19 Cam Drive Shaft Replacement
wa
ter
pro
of 2
5366QRM85 5366QRM16
2 Open top cover and remove left and 3 Disconnect connctor 1, remove two
right cover screws and remove cam drive module
2
4 2
1
1
3
2
2
3
5366QRM45a 5365QRM80
4 Mark belt outside with a waterproof pen 5 Remove belt and pulley
roof
wate
rp
3
Belt running direction important 2

Image artifacts when mounted
the wrong way 1
Mark belt outside with a waterproof pen.
5366QRM152 5366QRM26


Repair and Service
6 Open 2 screws, disconnect cable A and

7 Open hold down bracket
remove TPH fan
2
3
2
A
1
5366QRM47 5366QRM48
8 Open TPH module 9 Remove retaining ring and bearing bush
5366QRM49 5366QRM50
10 Take out cam drive shaft 11 Insert new cam drive shaft
5366QRM51 5366QRM57


Repair and Service
12 Insert bearing bush. Mount retaining 13 Close TPH module and hold down
ring. bracket
5366QRM58 5366QRM59
14 Mount TPH fan 15 Mount pulley and belt
2
1
2 1
A 4
3 2
5
5366QRM601 5366QRM31
16 Attention: Observe belt running

17 Mount cam drive module
direction

Image artifacts (17 mm banding)
when mounted the wrong way 3
Mount belt with mark outside. 1
See step # 4.
1
5366QRM153 5365QRM81


Repair and Service
18 Mount left and right cover . Close top

19 Connect all cables and switch on
cover
3 3 4 WARMING UP
Please Wait
1
4 5 Ready
3 1
2
5366QRM62 5366QRM23

SELECT CA
Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM07 5366QRM08
5366QRM09


Repair and Service
20 Devil/Themis/RAM Module Replacement
SW 7
2
5366QRM95 5366QRM16
3 1
5366QRM17 5366QRM87
4 At touching the Devil/Themis/RAM 5 Unplug all connectors at the

module observe ESD precautions Devil/Themis/RAM module
5366QRM88 5366QRM96


Repair and Service
6 Remove 2 screws A. Remove 7 Pack defective Devil/Themis/RAM

Devil/Themis/RAM Module Module and fill in forms
5 6
1
2
Waybill 4
Sender:
1 John Smith
Receiver: 3
AgfaSN:SN: 1234
1 Part:
Part: TPH
5366QRM97 5366QRM99
8 Mount the new Devil/Themis/RAM

9 Re-connect all connectors
module
2
2
5366QRM101 5366QRM102

cover
1
1
5366QRM94 5366QRM22


Repair and Service

3 4 WARMING UP
5 Ready
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM23 5366QRM07
5366QRM08 5366QRM09


Repair and Service
21 Hard Disk Drive Replacement
5365QRM128 5365QRM16
2 Loosen 12 screws in the rear and

3 Remove 4 screws, power and data cable
remove EMI shield
2
1
1
1
2
1
5365QRM129 5365QRM130a
5 Mount new hard disk. Observe ESD

4 Remove 4 screws
precautions.
5365QRM132 5365QRM132


Repair and Service
6 Remount 4 screws and harddisk power

7 Remount harddisk
and data cable
5365QRM133 5365QRM134
9 Get the device SW from MEDNET.

8 Remount EMI shield
Refer to 'readme.pdf' how to copy to CF
MEDNET
GSO Library
"Sign In"
Hardcopy
1
Dry Imagers
DRYSTAR 5302
2 ZIP File
Freeware
SW_XYZ.ZIP
readme.pdf
5365QRM135 5365QRM136
10 Insert CF card with SW 11 Connect all cables and switch on
3 4 WARMING UP
Please Wait
5 Ready
5365QRM137 5365QRM23


Repair and Service
12 Confirm installation of displayed

13 Wait till all data are copied
software
Copying IN
a:/ . . . R_XY_CZ.zip
to
c:/ . . . R_XY_CZ.zip
Installation IN
finished
Please remove card
5365QRM138 5365QRM139
14 Reload machine specific data 15 Print test image from the modality
5365QRM140 5365QRM141
5365QRM08 5365QRM09


Repair and Service
22 Main Drive Pulley & Belt Replacement
5366QRM77 5366QRM16
2 Open top cover and remove left cover 3 Remove belt and pulley
1 3
2
2
1
3
5366QRM25 5366QRM26
4 Mount new pulley and belt: Always

5 Mount side cover and close top cover
replace both together!
1
3
2
4
2
5
1
3
5366QRM31 5366QRM32


Repair and Service

3 4 WARMING UP
5 Ready
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM23 5366QRM07
5366QRM08 5366QRM09


Repair and Service
23 OSB Module Replacement
SW7 2
5365QRM121 5365QRM16
2 Open top cover and remove left cover 3 Caution: The Thermal Head can be hot!
1
2
5365QRM25 5365QRM37
4 Open the hold-down bracket 5 Open the TPH module
5365QRM48 5365QRM49


Repair and Service
7 Cut the wire ties, remove cable holder

6 Disconnect connector 1
and take out cable
5365QRM122 5365QRM123
8 Disconnect 3 screws and 4 cables at 9 Insert new OSB module. Mount screws
OSB module. Remove OSB module. and cables.
1 2
2
1
5365QRM124 5365QRM125
10 Re-mount cable holder, cable ties 11 Re-connect connector 1 at TH
5365QRM126 5365QRM127


Repair and Service
12 Close TPH module and hold-down 13 Re-mount left cover and close top
bracket cover
3
2
5365QRM59 5365QRM32
14 Connect all cables and switch on. 15 Print a SMPTE testimage

3 4 WARMING UP
5 Ready
SELECT CA
1 Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5365QRM23 5365QRM07
5365QRM08 5365QRM09


Repair and Service
24 Print Drum Module Replacement
SW7 wa
ter
2
pro
o f
5366QRM45 5366QRM16
2 Open top cover and remove left and

3 Remove cam drive module
right cover
2
4 2
1
1
3
2
2
3
5366QRM45 5366QRM46
4 Mark belt outside with a waterproof pen 5 Remove belt and pulley
roof
wate
rp
3

Image artifacts when mounted
the wrong way 1
Mark belt outside with a waterproof pen.
5366QRM152 5366QRM26


Repair and Service
6 Open 2 screws, disconnect cable A and

7 Open hold down bracket
remove TPH fan
2
3
2
A
1
5366QRM47 5366QRM48
9 Insert auxiliary fittings to lift the

8 Open TPH module
pressure arms
5366QRM49 5366QRM150
10 Remove 2 screws 11 Take out Print Drum Module
5366QRM52 5366QRM53


Repair and Service
12 Attention: The print drum has a

13 Insert new Print Drum Module
sensitive surface
Sensitive surface
Rubber surface can be damaged
Insert module carefully
5366QRM53a 5366QRM55
14 Take care that all clips of the guides

15 Re-mount 2 screws
are properly inserted
1
1
1 1
2
1
5366QRM55 5366QRM56
17 Close TPH module and hold down

16 Remove auxiliary fittings
bracket
5366QRM57 5366QRM59


Repair and Service
18 Mount TPH fan 19 Mount pulley and belt
2
1
2 1
A 4
3 2
5
5366QRM60 5366QRM31
20 Attention: Observe belt running

21 Mount cam drive module
direction

Image artifacts (17 mm banding)
when mounted the wrong way 1 3
Mount belt with mark outside.
See step # 4.
1
5366QRM153 5366QRM23
22 Mount left and right cover . Close top

23 Connect all cables and switch on
cover
3 3 4 WARMING UP
Please Wait
1
4 5 Ready
2
3 1
2
5366QRM62 5366QRM23


Repair and Service

SELECT CA
Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5365QRM07 5365QRM09
5365QRM34


Repair and Service
25 Tag Reader Assembly Replacement
2
1
5366QRM145 5366QRM02
2 Take out films and turn tray 3 Remove tag reader and cable
2
3
1
4
5
1
3
5366QRM03 5366QRM04
4 Mount new tag reader 5 Load films and insert ray
2 1
1
3
4
5366QRM05 5366QRM11


Repair and Service

SELECT CA
Print Testimage
3 smpte_1300.zip
4 smpte_lin.zip
5366QRM07 5366QRM08
5366QRM09


Repair and Service
26 TPH Filter Module Replacement
Required Spare Part, Tools & Time 1 Open top cover
5365QRM110 5365QRM36
2 Remove 2 screws. Lift out module. 3 Remount new module
5365QRM111 5365QRM112
4 Close top cover 5 Your Drystar 5302 is ready to use
5365QRM44 5365QRM09


Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Adjustments and calibrations
Chapter 3.6:
List of contents
1 Adjustments ............................................................................. 1
1.1 Horizontal film alignment procedure ...................................................... 1
2 Calibrations .............................................................................. 2
2.1 Film Calibration ........................................................................................ 3
2.2 CDM calibration ........................................................................................ 4
2.3 Print Head (TH) Calibration...................................................................... 6
3 Checks ...................................................................................... 8
3.1 Density reproduction check .................................................................... 8
3.2 Check for dust stripes / TPH Cleaning Procedure............................... 10

Repair and Service
1 Adjustments
Following adjustments have to be performed at the printer:
Adjustment To be done .... Details

see....
Horizontal film alignment • in case after TH replacement the 1.1
blank left or right frame is < 2mm
1.1 Horizontal film alignment procedure
When? The horizontal film alignment is necessary when:

• The TPH has been replaced and
• the blank frame at the left and right hand side is < 2 mm
How? (1) In the printer web pages select 'Service Engineer Tools'
WebPages (2) Select 'Enter Service Command Session'
(3) Select '6 Calibration - 4 Horizontal Alignment'
(4) Select 'upper tray' or 'lower tray'
(5) Measure the left and right blank border of the test film
(6) Enter the values in the browser screen
(7) Select 'Accept Changes'
Welcome to this
Service - Calibration
Horizontal alignment
Left white border 0.0 (mm)

Right white border 0.0 (mm)
Accept changes Discard changes

536636ac.cdr
Figure 1

Repair and Service
Adjustments and calibrations DD+DIS150.05E
2 Calibrations
Following calibrations have to be performed at the printer:

see....
Film calibration • During maintenance. 2.1
• After replacement of the Thermal print
head (TPH).
• During the troubleshooting procedure.
refer to chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting
Internal densitometer • After output module replacement 2.2
(CDM) calibration
• When the density reproduction check
indicates to calibrate the CDM
• During the troubleshooting procedure.
refer to chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting
Print Head (TH) • During the troubleshooting procedure. 2.3
calibration Refer to chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting

Repair and Service
2.1 Film Calibration
• Film calibration by default is executed automatically at every 5th new film

package.
• It can be activated/deactivated in the Key-operator menu "1. Change
settings - 5. Image quality - 1. General - select default for film calibration
(default = ON)". Also the calibration frequency (Default = every 5 film
packs) can be entered there.
• It can be initiated manually, too.
• This manual Film calibration is explained further on.
When? • At least each 5000 films (adjustable maintenance action. Refer to chapter
9 Maintenance).
• After replacement of the Thermal print head (TPH).
• In case of a drift of the maximum density.
• During the troubleshooting procedure. refer to chapter 3.3,
Troubleshooting
(1) Select in key-operator menu

Calibration'
(2) Select upper or lower input
tray: The calibration film as
shown in Figure 2 is printed
and the measured Dmax is
shown.
second input tray
536336as.cdr
Figure 2

Repair and Service
2.2 CDM calibration
• Only following densitometers can be used for the calibration: McBeth TR-
924, Gretag D200-2, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310, X-Rite 331, X-Rite 341
• The densitometer must be calibrated with the calibration wedge of the
supplier according to the calibration procedure of the supplier.
When? • The calibration of the internal densitometer CDM via an external

densitometer is necessary when the density reproduction check for a
specific material is not OK after a film calibration.
• After replacement of the Output module (which includes the internal
densitometer).
Purpose • Adjust the CDM to another calibrated, external densitometer

• To compensate for measurement drifts
How? (1) In the webpages - menu 'Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service
WebPages Command session' select '6. Calibration - 2. Internal densitometer
calibration'
(2) Follow the instructions on the WebPages. Refer to Figure 3.
(3) Enter the measured densities in the browser window.

Repair and Service

Service - Calibration Service - Calibration

1. Film Calibration Internal Densitometer Calibration
2. Internal Densitometer Calibration Select Densitometer
3. Print Head Calibration Macbeth TR924
4. Horizontal Alignment Gretag
X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
Go back
Start Calibration Go back Reset Values
Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer Welcome to this
Service - Calibration Internal Densitometer Calibration

Internal Densitometer Calibration
SUCCEEDED
Upper Tray Enter below the measurements of the printer calibration sheet
Lower Tray
Step Previous values Step Previous values
00 0.25 0.24 01 0.25 0.24
02 0.26 0.25 03 0.30 0.31
04 0.54 0.55 05 0.94 0.95
536636ak.cdr 06 1.43 1.45 07 1.96 1.97
08 2.50 2.49 09 3.00 2.99
10 3.18 3.15 11 2.80 2.80
12 2.28 2.28 13 1.71 1.75
14 1.17 1.20 15 0.71 0.72
16 0.37 0.38 17 0.26 0.26
18 0.25 0.24 19 0.25 0.24
Accept changes Discard changes Reset values
Figure 3
Always perform a Film calibration (refer to 2.1) and check the Density
reproduction (refer to 3.1) after a CDM calibration.

Repair and Service
2.3 Print Head (TH) Calibration
When? • The Print Head Profile calibration is necessary whenever vertical stripes
are not longer acceptable
Vertical stripes are unacceptable in case they are visible in the medical
service test image! Refer to Figure 5.
How? (1) Print the Medical service test image

WebPages (2) Clean the thermal head with a cleaning tissue lightly moistened with
Isopropyl - alcohol. The last cleaning action must be carried out in one
way.
(3) In the webpages - menu 'Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service
Command session' select '6. Calibration - 3. Print Head Calibration'.
(4) Follow the instructions on the WebPages. Refer to Figure 4

Service - Calibration Service - Calibration

1. Film Calibration Printhead Calibration
2. Internal Densitometer Calibration Select Densitometer
3. Print Head Calibration Macbeth TR924
4. Horizontal Alignment Gretag
X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
Go back
Start Calibration Go back Reset Values
Welcome to this
Service - Calibration
Printhead Calibration Succeeded
Upper Tray Enter below the measurements of the printer calibration sheet
Lower Tray Step Step
Select a 14" film for optimum quality 00 2.0 01 2.1
02 2.0 03 2.1
04 2.1 05 2.1
536636ag.cdr
06 2.1 07 2.1
08 2.2 09 2.1
10 2.1 11 2.2
12 2.1 13 2.1
14 2.1 15 2.0
16 2.1 17 2.1
18 2.1 19 2.1
20 2.1 21 2.2
Accept changes Discard changes Reset values
Field 1 Field 21
Figure 4

Repair and Service
(5) Print the Medical service test

image (refer to Figure 5).
(6) Check the macro banding in the
medical image.
• If the vertical stripes are
acceptable, continue with next
step.
• If the vertical stripes are still
unacceptable, but improved with
respect to the first printed medical
image, repeat the procedure.
• If the vertical stripes are still
unacceptable and not improved
with respect to the first printed
medical image replace the
Thermal Print head (refer to
Section 3.5).
(7) Perform a Film calibration. Figure 5
Refer to 2.1.
With Print Head Calibration only macro TPH banding can be solved. Sharp
and or small (10 mm) discontinuities can not be solved by a Print Head
Calibration.

Repair and Service
3 Checks
Following checks can be performed at the printer:

see....
Check for dust stripes / TH During troubleshooting 3.1
cleaning procedure procedure. Refer to chapter 3.3,
Troubleshooting.
Density reproduction check During maintenance. refer to 3.2
chapter 9, Maintenance
During troubleshooting
procedure. refer to chapter 3.3,
Troubleshooting.
3.1 Density reproduction check
Background With the density reproduction check the difference for a specific film type
Information between optical density defined in the sensitometric calibration file and the
printed optical density, measured with an external densitometer is checked.
This is a plausibility check for the CDM: In case the measured density values
are out of the specified range, the CDM requires a re-calibration.
This procedure must be carried out with every used film type:
(1) In the browser pages select menu "Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Service Command Session - 3 Print Testimage"
(2) Print out LinCheck.zip and measure the density of the eleven 100 % –
0% fields with a calibrated MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite
301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag D200-2 densitometer.
(3) To check linearity fill in measured values in corresponding Excel file:
Ds5302 density reproduction check DT2B.xls or
Ds5302 density reproduction check DT2C.xls
These Excel files can be downloaded from MedNet, download area

'GSO library - Hardcopy - Dry Imagers - Drystar 5302 - Freeware'.
(4) After the measured values are filled in, the density reproduction is
calculated automatically.
(5) At the right hand side of the table is shown, whether the Density
Reproduction is ok or not. In case it is not ok you are requested to
carry out a CDM calibration.

Repair and Service
Select densitometer: X-rite 341

4 Dmax = 314
Square Measured density Target density Density diff. Check

100% 20 20 0 0
90% 47 49,4 -2,4 0
80% 73 78,8 -5,8 0
70% 104 108,2 -4,2 0
60% 133 137,6 -4,6 0
50% 163 167 -4 0
40% 189 196,4 -7,4 0
30% 218 225,8 -7,8 0
20% 246 255,2 -9,2 0
10% 274 284,6 -10,6 0
0% 306 314 -8 0
When entering the measured density values the decimal point appears in a different spot,
e.g. measured value = 0.23, value to enter = 23.0
Density Lower limit Upper limit
0 0 0
30 -5 5
45 -7 7
60 -8 8 Density Reproduction = OK
75 -9 9 No CDM calibration needed for DT2B film
90 -10 10
105 -11 11
120 -12 12
135 -12 12
150 -13 13
165 -13 13
180 -14 14
195 -14 14
210 -14 14
225 -15 15
240 -15 15
255 -15 15
270 -16 16
285 -16 16
300 -16 16
315 -16 16
Density difference SMPTE image DT2B film in Ds 5302
20
15
X-rite 310
10 X-rite 331
Density Difference
X-rite 341
5
X-rite 301 Lower limit
Mac Beth TR924
0 Upper limit
Gretag D200-2
Density difference
-5
-10
-15
-20
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
Target Density
536636af.cdr
Figure 6

Repair and Service
3.2 Check for dust stripes / TPH Cleaning Procedure

When? • Whenever dust stripes seem to be present
• During troubleshooting procedure. Refer to chapter 3.3,
Troubleshooting.
(1) Check the films for dust stripes as described in the flowchart of
Figure 7
TH cleaning
Dry TH cleaning
procedure
procedure
Print STI2 and *

medical_image test image
Dismount TH
vertical stripes No Clean TH with

Okay Isopropyl alcohol
visible ?
(”wet” cleaning)
Yes or in doubt
Use ink eraser
Clean TH with for cleaning.
Isopropyl alcohol Refer to figure next page.
Clean TH with
Print STI2 test image* Isopropyl alcohol
additional Mount TH
Yes
vertical stripes
visible ?
Clean TH with
No Isopropyl alcohol
Previous Stripes No
Okay
still visible ?
Print STI2 test image
*
Yes
Perform Dry TH
Cleaning Procedure
New vertical Yes
536410mm.cdr
stripes visible ?
No
* Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service Command Session
- 3 Print Image
Vertical No
stripes visible ? Okay
** Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service Command Session
- 6 Calibrate - 3 Print Head Calibration
Yes
Perform TH **
profile calibration.
Observe TH cleaning rules

described next page
Stripes visible in No
medical_image test Okay
image ?
Yes
Replace TH
Figure 7

Repair and Service
Basic Rules for the TH Cleaning Procedure

• Use the correct cleaning material.
1. Wet cleaning: Use a lint free cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl -
alcohol or a cleaning tissue.
2. Dry cleaning: Use the blue side of an ink eraser. Make a linear
cleaning movement, parallel to the resistor line. Refer to Figure 8.
3. For the last wet cleaning action observe the rule: The last cleaning
action must be carried out in one way!
• For the Isopropyl alcohol observe the rule: As less water is in the alcohol
as better. Water can damage the TH. We recommend using a 90%
Isopropyl alcohol.
• Before dry cleaning with an ink eraser to remove print stripes dismount
the thermal head.
• During cleaning do not push on the IC cover of the Thermal Head.
TH resistor line
TH cross section
TH top view
Blue side
Ink eraser
e.g. Pelican
type BR40 536410cd.cdr
linear cleaning movement

parallel to TH resistor line
Figure 8: Usage of ink eraser for TH cleaning
Instruct the customer, not to fill the input tray with dropped films or films
coming from jam clearances:
• These re-inserted films can be contaminated with dust and fingerprints
which can result in image artifacts or a defective thermal head.
• If the film is inserted the wrong way, the thermal head gets heavily
contaminated, what makes a service intervention necessary.

Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Software menus, Settings
Chapter 3.7:
List of contents
1 Controls at the local Keypad ...................................................... 1
2 Key-Operator Menu via local keypad......................................... 2
3 Key-Operator Webpages in SW Rel. 1.8 .................................... 3
4 Service Command Webpages in SW Rel. 1.8............................ 5
5 Service Engineer Tools Webpages in SW Rel. 1.8 ................... 7
6 Difference Key-Operator and Service Command Session in

SW Rel. 1.9 ................................................................................. 11

Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5302 Chapter 3.7 / I
2005-09-09 (Type 5366/100) Agfa Comapny Confidential
Repair and Service
1 Controls at the local Keypad

Overview of user interface controls: The keypad The control buttons
1 2
Power / Reset To power on or off the printer.
6 button To reset the printer.
3 Keypad keys:
To access the advanced functions of the Key-

4 Key-
operator mode. Refer to next page.
operator key
5
To quit the current function or exit a menu without
Escape key
saving modifications.
1 Power/Reset button
2 Display (In Key-operator mode)
Confirm key To select a menu;
3 Keyboard To accept an entry in a menu.
4 Status indicator LED To move the cursor to the previous entry field.
5 Film input tray To scroll upwards.
Up key
To increment the number in a(n) (alpha)numerical
6 Film output tray
entry field.
To move the cursor to the next entry field.
The status indicator LED
To scroll downwards.
Down key
At the right side of the display, a LE D indicates the status of the Drystar 5300. To decrement the number in a(n)
(alpha)numerical entry field.
Receive Printing
Color Light Status Action To scroll backwards through multiple choices
jobs? OK?
within a field.
Constant Ready (standby) Yes Yes Proceed. Left key To move the entry position in a(n)
Startup sequence No No (alpha)numerical entry field from right to left.
To toggle between values in a field.
Receiving jobs Yes Yes
To scroll forwards through multiple choices within
Calculating Yes Yes Wait. a field.
Green
Blinking Printing Yes Yes Right key To move the entry position in a(n)
(alpha)numerical entry field from left to right.
Calibrating Yes No To toggle between values in a field.
Installation No No
Proceed with " All keys (except the Key-operator key) have a LED that is lit when the key
Key-operator Yes/No Yes/No is valid in a certain condition.
the activity.
Service mode No No
" Press and hold down an arrow key to scroll quickly through a list
Refer to or a menu.
Input tray empty Yes Yes/No User / Reference
Manual
Refer to
Blinking Film jam Yes No User / Reference
Manual
Red
Refer to
Warning Yes Yes User / Reference
Manual
Refer to
Constant Error status No No Section
Troubleshooting
5365_100_3702.cdr
Page 1

Repair and Service
Software menus, Settings DD+DIS150.05E
2 Key-Operator Menu via local keypad

Based on SW rel. 1.8
=
General
Show settings General
Other...
Upper input tray
Lower input tray
Time and date
Network(DICOM)
Language
Image quality
Beep on empty tray
Logical printers
Installed datasets
Change settings General

Upper Input tray Film view
Lower Input tray Film type
Network(DICOM) Film format
Image quality
Film view
Film type
Film format
Print image Test image
From CF-Card
Printer AE-title
Save configuration General ? ostname
NETWORK only Domain name

Printer IP-address
Netmask
Restore configuration General
Router IP-address
NETWORK only
Remove modality
Add modality
Calibration Film calibration

Clean therm. head
General setting
Per modality setting
Service actions Error messages

SMPTE
Warning messages
Etc...
Repair history
Maintenance Show open and update
Show closed items
Quality Control
Installation From CF-Card

Printer installation
536637cc.cdr

Repair and Service
3 Key-Operator Webpages in SW Rel. 1.8

Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer Prompt
Welcome to this
Enter Password DryStar 5302 printer
Operator tools drystar
Welcome to this
Key-operator tools ******
KEY OPERATOR TOOLS DryStar 5302 printer
HOME Remote sessions
Service engineer tools OK Cancel Enter key-operator command session Please wait while the printer is initializing
Specialist tools Release remote command session for Remote Session...
Security Tools
HELP
Welcome to this 1 Welcome to this 2 Welcome to this 3 Welcome to this

DryStar 5302 printer 1 DryStar 5302 printer DryStar 5302 printer DryStar 5302 printer
2 Key-Operator - Show settings

Key-Operator - Main Key-Operator - Change settings Key-Operator - Print Image
1. Show settings 3 1. General
2.1 3.1
1. General 1. Test Image
2. Change settings 2. Input tray 2. From Printer Flash Card
3. Print image 4 3. Network (DICOM)
2. Input tray 2.2 3. From Remote Computer
3. Network (DICOM)
4. Save configuration 5 4. Image quality 4. Image quality
5. Restore config. 5. Logical Printers 2.3
6. Calibration 6 6. Installed datasets Go back
7. Service actions Go back
2.4
8. Quality Control 7 Go back
9. Installation
8
leave remote session 9
4 Welcome to this 5 Welcome to this 6 Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer DryStar 5302 printer DryStar 5302 printer
Key-Operator - Save configuration Key-Operator - Restore configuration Key-Operator - Calibration

1. To Printer Flash Card 1. From CF-Card 1. Film Calibration
2. To this Computer 2. From Remote Computer 2. Therm. Head clean
3. Frm dd/mm/yy hh:mm
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Go back Go back
Go back
3.1 7.1 8.1 9.1
refer to next page
5365_100_3701.cdr
Page 1

Key-Operator - Service actions Key-Operator - Quality Control Key-Operator - Installation

1. Error Messages 1. New Software Installation 9.1
2. Warning Messages 1. Quality Control 8.1
Based on SW Rel. 1.8 2. Printer Installation Wizard
3. Repair history
4. Maintenance 7.1 Go back
Go back
Go back

Repair and Service
2.1 Welcome to this 2.2 Welcome to this

2.3 Welcome to this 2.4 Welcome to this 9.1 Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer DryStar 5302 printer DryStar 5302 printer DryStar 5302 printer DryStar 5302 printer
Key-Operator - Change general settings Key-Operator - Change input tray settings Key-Operator - Change network settings (dicom) Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings Key-Operator - Installation
Date: 19 Oct. 2004 Software Upgrade
Time: 08 Upper input tray 1. Network settings
30 00
Normal 2. Remove modality 1. General
Film view 3. Add modality 2. Modality XYZ 1. From CF-card
Language English Back
Chinese Simpl. 2. From this Computer
Tag film format 14x17" Go back
Japanese
Go back Go back
Beep on empty tray 5 beeps 11x14"
14x14"
Keypad contrast (60 ... 80) 68 Typical 68 10x12"
Keypad backlight (0 ... 100) 50 Welcome to this Welcome to this Welcome to this
Tag film type DT2B
* Site name
* Site address Key-Operator - Installation
* City Drystar DT2C Key-Operator - Change network settings (dicom) Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Before install.
* Country code (tel) please make backup
* Telephone Printer AE-title DS5300 Daily used name CT2
Modem Lower input tray Hostname ds5300 Modality AE-title CT2_ARC
Domain name 1. OK, make backup
* Department Normal Linear 2. SKIP backup
* Contact person Film view Printer IP-Address 12.10.68.41 Look Up Table:
Back Kanamori
* Delivery address Netmask 255.0.0.0
Tag film format 14x17" Kanamorilike Go back
E-mail address Router IP-address
Comments LDAP server Interpolation:
Overruling to film format 14x17" Replication
Service host IP-address
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values Linear
11x14" Alert mailing
14x14" off CubicHi-res
10x12" on CubicBell
Welcome to this
Tag film type DT2B Maximum density: 280 DryStar 5300 printer
3.1 Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values 285
Welcome to this
Overruling to film type Drystar DT2B 290 Key-Operator - Installation
Drystar DT2C 295
Key-Operator - Print image
8.1 Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer Choose Dataset Browse .....
1. Ktbwd2n.zip Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
2. smpte_kan.zip Proceed Go Back Reset Values
3. smpte_l300.zip Key-Operator - Service actions
4. smpte_lin.zip 7.1 Welcome to this Data of last QC measuring Welcome to this
5. tpa.zip Date: 20-NOV-2004
Time: 09:01
Go back Initials: Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Key-Operator - Service actions
Max D: 3.1
1. Maintenance settings
DD: 0.2 Default film calibration off
2. Pending maintenance actions
Mid Density: 1.1 on
3. Closed maintenance actions
Base + Fog: 0.2
New reference: yes
no Default Densitometer Macbeth TR924
Based on SW Rel. 1.8
Go back Gretag
Comment:
X-Rite 301
Accept changes Go Back New QC measuring X-Rite 310
Reset Values Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values

Welcome to this
Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Service actions DryStar 5302 printer
MAINTENANCE SETTINGS
Reset Item Cycles to go Factory settings
Thermal head cleaning required 4841 5000 Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Replace thermal head anti dust filter 24841 25000 Select frequency
Replace thermal head (end of life) 62500 62500
Film calibration upper tray required 39841 40000
Every 5 packs
Film calibration lower tray required 500 5000
Service maintenance required 2333 5000 Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
Go back
5365_100_3701.cdr
Page 2

Repair and Service
4 Service Command Webpages in SW Rel. 1.8

Welcome to this
Welcome to this
SERVICE TOOLS
Operator tools Prompt
List of errors
Key-operator tools Enter Password Printer Infocounters report
mega DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report
Service engineer tools QA Report Page
******
Software versions
Specialist tools Remote sessions
OK Cancel Welcome to this
Security Tools Show printer status DryStar 5302 printer
HELP Enter service command session
Please wait while the printer is initializing
Connectivity tools
for Remote Session...
Scaling Setup
1 Welcome to this
2 Welcome to this 3 Welcome to this
1 DryStar 5302 printer DryStar 5302 printer
2 Service - Show settings

Service - Main Service - Change settings Service - Print Image
1. Show settings 3 1. General
2.1 3.1
1. General 1. Test Image
2. Change settings 2. Input tray 2. From Printer Flash Card
3. Print image 4 3. Network (DICOM)
2. Input tray 2.2 3. From Remote Computer
3. Network (DICOM)
4. Save configuration 5 4. Image quality 4. Image quality
5. Restore config. 5. Logical Printers 2.3
6. Calibration 6 6. Installed datasets Go back
7. Service actions Go back
2.4
8. Quality Control 7 Go back
9. Installation
8
leave remote session 9
Service - Save configuration Service - Restore configuration Service - Calibration

1. To Printer Flash Card 1. From CF-Card 1. Film Calibration
2. To this Computer 2. From Remote Computer 2. Internal Densitometer Calibration
3. Frm dd/mm/yy hh:mm 3. Print Head Calibration
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 4. Horizontal Alignment
Go back
Go back
3.1 7.1 8.1 9.1
Go back
refer to next page
5365_100_3701.cdr
Page 8
7 Welcome to this
Service - Service actions Service - Quality Control Service - Installation

1. Maintenance 7.1 1. Quality Control 8.1 1. New Software Installation 9.1
2. Errors 2. Printer Installation Wizard
3. Warnings
4. Repair history Go back
Based on SW Rel. 1.8 5. Logging Go back
Go back

Repair and Service
2.2 2.3 Welcome to this 2.4

2.1 Welcome to this Welcome to this DryStar 5302 printer
Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer 8.1 Welcome to this
Service - Change input tray settings Service - Change network settings (dicom) Service - Change Image quality settings
Service - Change general settings Service - Quality Control
If RF-tag is missing or malfunctioning Data of last QC measuring
Date: 19 Oct. 2004 1. Network settings
Time: 08 Printing with Dmax=2.00 Date: 20-NOV-2004
30 00 2. Remove modality 1. General
Printing not possible Time: 09:01
3. Add modality 2. Modality XYZ
Language English Upper input tray Initials:
Chinese Simpl. Max D: 3.1
Normal Go back
Japanese Film view DD: 0.2
Back Go back
Mid Density: 1.1
Tag film format 14x17" Base + Fog: 0.2
Beep on empty tray 5 beeps New reference: yes
Keypad contrast (60 ... 80) 68 Typical 68 Overruling to film format 14x17" no
Keypad backlight (0 ... 100) 50 11x14" Welcome to this Welcome to this Comment:
14x14"
* Site name 10x12" Accept changes Go Back New QC measuring
* Site address Tag film type DT2B Service - Change network settings (dicom) Service - Change Image quality settings Reset Values
* City
* Country code (tel) Overruling to film type Drystar DT2B Printer AE-title DS5300 Daily used name Printer
* Telephone Hostname ds5300 Modality AE-title DS5300
Modem Domain name
Linear
* Department Printer IP-Address 12.10.68.41 Look Up Table: Kanamori
* Contact person Netmask 255.0.0.0
Kanamorilike
* Delivery address Router IP-address
E-mail address LDAP server Interpolation:
Replication
Comments Service host IP-address
Linear
Alert mailing
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values off CubicHi-res
on CubicBell
Maximum density: 280
3.1 Welcome to this Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values 285
290
295
Service - Print image Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
1. LinCheck.zip
2 .STI1.zip
3. STI2.zip Service - Installation
4. medical_image.zip Before install. Welcome to this
please make backup DryStar 5302 printer
Go back
1. OK, make backup
9.1 Welcome to this 2. SKIP backup Service - Change Image quality settings
Go back Default film calibration off
7.1 Welcome to this on
DryStar 5302 printer Service - Installation
Software Upgrade
Service - Service actions Welcome to this Gretag
1. From CF-card DryStar 5302 printer
1. Maintenance settings X-Rite 301
2. Pending maintenance actions 2. From this Computer X-Rite 310
3. Closed maintenance actions Service - Installation
Go back
Go back
Choose Dataset Browse .....
Welcome to this
Proceed Go Back Reset Values DryStar 5302 printer
5365_100_3701.cdr
Page 9
Refer to section Service - Change Image quality settings

"Difference Key-Operator and Select frequency
Service command session"
Every 5 packs
Based on SW Rel. 1.8 Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values

Repair and Service
5 Service Engineer Tools Webpages in SW Rel. 1.8

Welcome to this
S1
Operator tools Prompt
SERVICE TOOLS S2
Key-operator tools Enter Password
mega HOME General information S3
Service engineer tools List of errors
****** S4
Specialist tools
OK Cancel DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report S5
Security Tools QA Report Page
Software versions S6
HELP ______________ Power supply state
S4 Remote sessions refer to section "Key-Operator Web pages"
DC 5 Volts 4.96875 V Show printer status
refer to section "Service command web pages"
DC 3 Volts 3.2714844 V Enter key-operator command session
DC +12 Volts 12.007315 V Enter service command session S7
DC -12 Volts -12.014129 V Release remote command session
S3 DC 24 Volts 24.173584 V
Security Setup
HTTP Yes DC TH Volts 0 V Connectivity tools S8
HTTPS No DC TH Amps 0.0 A Scaling Setup
.............. ______________ Error state DICOM profile editor S9
Current warnings LPD Profile Editor
Network info Current errors
S10
IP-address 10.233.68.108 ______________ Temperatures
Hostname DI53IE2 Heatsink 52.70407 C Printqueue editor S11
Netmask 255.255.248.0 Keypad-display 41.5 C Controller logging
................................... Drum-region 36.5 C
CPU-region 52 C
Module repair S12
Cable info : 100 Mbit Half-Duplex Modules
Current Max density 310.45212 points
...........................................
link partner : 100HD 10HD autonegotiation ______________ Density meter S13
Dark current Idrange 0: 78
Cable info : 100 Mbit Half-Duplex
range 1: 78 S13
Output Queue range 2: 77
Light current I09561, lamp at 75 % LIST OF ERRORS
S1 Welcome to this
Retry timeout0 DryStar 5302 printer
....................................... ______________ Display
Contrast-setting 68 MODULE : vilismodule
Backlight-setting 50 Elabel : Yes HOME | SERVICE
Dicom input
........................................ ______________ Status Upper
Blemish heating enabled HC207000 : vilismodule.dsh.connected Filminput
Module
CDM device enabled *TypeDefect Lower
LPD Profiles *Context207000 Filminput
............................................. Online diagnosis enabled Module
Security disabled *ActionSeeManual Upper Pickup
______________ Storage *Reason1Connector P9 not connected on VILIS Module
Site info Cure1Connect P9 on VILIS Lower Pickup
City Removable storage not present Module
Removable storage size - *Reason2VILIS defect Filmsensor
Site Name Cure2Replace Module
Site address Removable storage free -
PartMOD07 Drumdrive
Country code Fixed (c:) storage size 122 MB (128045056 bytes) Module
Department name Fixed (c:) storage free 0 bytes Coolingfan

HC207001 : vilismodule.psu.connected Module
Phone *TypeDefect EBox-fan
Module
Modem *Context207001 Camshaft
Comment Module
Installation Date INFO COUNTER drystar 5300 S2 *ActionSeeManual
*Reason1Connector P15 not connected on VILIS Output
Module
Cure1Connect P15 on VILIS Suspension
InfoCounters 1. Site and system info: *Reason2VILIS defect Drive Module
Last error codes ESC ------------------------ Cure2Replace
Pump And
Values
...................................... Date: 18-Nov-2004 PartMOD07 Module
Time: 12:42:15
Errors/Warnings
Name Total Relative Date of last
Welcome to this S6
1.1 Device info: DryStar 5302 printer
ESC1F Local SSL trusted certificate wi...4848Apr-27-2004 15:52:24 Current printjob(s) will be printed, queueing new printjobs will be disabled
----------------
.............................................. Product name: drystar
Type-No: 5300
Subtype-No: Current Incidents:
Serial-No: 1234
Current Warnings:
FPGAVersion3.0.1 S5 Manufacture date:
Installation date:
01-Aug-2004 16:45:00
31-Nov-2004 13:10:30 S8 S9 S10
OSVersion Current Defects:
### /portex info
Versions : Portex=2004.05
1.2 Site info:
--------------
S11 S12 S13
Patch vers: 0 City: Padova
Build date: 13-oct-2004 16:12 Site name: Connectathon refer to next 3 pages
Boot date : 17-NOV-2004 17:06:26 Site address: Avenida 12
releaseRemoteSession
S7
Net ID : 10.233.65.97 dry900 Department name: X-Ray 5365_100_3701.cdr
Ethernet : 08:00:66:80:44:09 Phone: 1234321 Page 3
Modem:
DriverVersionVersion: HW3.12 ; build timestamp : time = 14:36:45,21 Comment:
ControllerVersion P4D3.03.15
DrystarVersion R1.9 C1 1.3 Hardware info:
BoardVersion VILIS2.2
M16Version 45
------------------ Based on SW Rel. 1.8
CPU: 0 - THEMIS 1.3 rev=? **
RAM: 512 Mbyte

Repair and Service
HOME HELP Controller Setup HOME HELP DICOM Input Setup HELP Host Profile: Name XYZ
Reduction icon on image: yes S8 Dicom Print SCP Servers S9 These are the default settings for all print jobs coming from the host S9.2
Kernel: when no image scaling is needed for CubicHighRes: Setup Dicom Print SCP Servers S9.1 The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input.
Automatically switch to CubicBell: yes Dicom Host Profiles
Nick Name: Name XYZ
Use CubicBell smooth factor: 0.35 ( >= 0.1 and <= 10 ) A 'Host Profile' defines the print parameters for a specific host (modality). Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': Host AE
Available Host Profiles: Use this profile only for local SCP server: all
New S9.2 Number of Copies:
OK Changes require reboot View/Edit Print Priority: low
Remove Polarity: normal
Clone Film Orientation: portrait
HELP Site Defaults At run-time, profile selection is done based on the incoming 'Calling AE title' Trim: no
and the receiving SCP server. Film Size ID:
These are the default print settings for all Dicom input for which no special 'Host If no profile is found, the default (site) profile will be used. Medium Type:
Profile' is made. The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input. Print even if Film Size ID/Medium type not supported: yes
You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the left side. Edit the default (site) profile Validate profiles Auto Dicom Configuration Kernel: site Edit Custom
Only some parameters can be edited. S9.3 Magnification: Edit
Pixel Size: ratio: Edit
Input status Perception LUT: kanamori
Number of Copies: 1 S9.3 Kanamori Like value:
Print Priority: LOW idle Custom value:
Polarity: normal Refresh Illumination (cd/m2):
Film Orientation :portrait Reflected Ambient Light (cd/m2):
Trim: NO Border Density (OD x100):
Film Size ID: Update profile database
Medium Type: Minimum Density (OD x100):
Print even if Film Size ID/Medium type not supported: YES Select profile database file to upload: Browse ...
Kernel:Interpolation Type cubicHighRes,smoothFactor: -2.5 Annotation 1: site
Upload new DB Edit Custom
Magnification:Magn: max Annotation 2:
Pixel Size:ratio: 1.0 / 1.0 site Edit Custom
Window (%):
Perception LUT: kanamori Level (%):
HOME HELP DICOM Print SCP Setup
Kanamori Like value :0 Image Orientation: r0
Custom value: Conformance/Status Level:
Illumination (cd/m2): 2000
Setup one or more Dicom SCP servers on this device: S9.1
One 'Dicom Print SCP server' is capable of handling multiple Dicom Nevent enabled: off
Reflected Ambient Light (cd/m2): 10 Mammo modality: NO site
print associations
Border Density (OD x100): BLACK Association Timeout (s):
Empty Image Density (OD x100): BLACK Dicom Print SCP Image Timeout (s):
Minimum Density (OD x100): Allow IMPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN:
Maximum Density (OD x100): 300 Internal Name: DS5300 Allow EXPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN:
Annotation 1: none Edit Custom Clear this field to remove the settings for this Dicom Print SCP server Allow EXPLICIT VR BIG ENDIAN:
Annotation 2: none Edit Custom Called AE title: DS5300 Resolution:320
Window (%): Listen at Port: 104 Supported SOP classes: Edit
Level (%): Max. allowed associations: 10 Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes):
Image Orientation :r0 Activate at startup:
Conformance/Status Level: 0 Secure channel (SSL): OK Cancel Show Defaults Show last Input
Nevent enabled: OFF Comments: Manually customized items are show in red
Mammo: NO
Association Timeout (s): 0
Image Timeout (s) :0
Allow IMPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: true
Allow EXPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: true OK Create new Dicom Print SCP Cancel Changes require reboot HOME HELP LPD Server Setup
Allow EXPLICIT VR BIG ENDIAN: true
Resolution: 320 LPD Server S10.1
Supported SOP classes :All enabled
HOME HELP LPD Setup Port: 515 Clear it to remove the LPD Server
Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes): 23
Max allowed associations: 10
OK Cancel LPD Servers Activate at startup:
S10 Secure channel:
5365_100_3701.cdr
LPD Server Setup S10.1 Comments:
Page 4
New
Based on SW Rel. 1.8 View/Edit S10.2
Remove OK Create new LPD Server Cancel Changes require reboot
Clone
Layout Preview
Validate All Profiles

Repair and Service
S11.1 S11.2 S11.3
HELP LPD Profile: Name XYZ HOME HELP Network Configuration HOME HELP Output Queue
These settings can be overruled by the LPD protocol. Basic IP Routing DNS Ethernet Reboot Device S11 Output Queue contents:
You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the front.
S10.2 S12
Filter on all
Basic IP settings
IP address
Host name Show History Clear History Auto-Refresh
Profile Name: Name XYZ Domain
Medium Size: _14x17 Subnetmask Input state:
Medium Type: bluebased
Layout: Optimal Row
Number of copies: Obtain IP settings automatically (RARP/BOOTP/DHCP) no
Film Orientation: portrait Output Queue setup:
Region Of Interest: Edit Retry timeout (seconds) range: 31..599
Pixel Size: ratio: Edit Max retry count (0 = retry forever)
Polarity: normal
Image Orientation: r0 Submit
Input LUT: Edit
Usertaste Gray: Edit
Usertaste Color: Edit
Magnification: Edit
Kernel: Edit
Edit HOME HELP Network Configuration HOME HELP Network Configuration
Trim:
Background Color: Grayscale Edit
Basic IP Routing DNS Ethernet Reboot Device Basic IP Routing DNS Ethernet Reboot Device
Empty Color: Gray: Grayscale Edit
PostScript Requested page size: Width: Height: Routing DNS servers
PostScript policy: pagesizeDependent S11.1 S11.2
Default gateway
Resolution: 320 A DNS server translates a given hostname into an IP address.
Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes): OK Changes require reboot
Annotation 1: Edit
Annotation 2: Edit More Routes
Reach Device via gateway:
OK Cancel Factory Defaults Remove
Customized items are show in red. Add Changes require reboot
Test Routes
Ping a device Ping Test DNS
Enter a hostname: Resolve
5365_100_3701.cdr
HOME HELP Network Configuration Page 1
Basic IP Routing DNS Ethernet Reboot Device

S11.3
Ethernet
Counters:
Current line properties: 100 Mbit Full-Duplex Total Rx Packets = 2056422
Link partner (other side): : 100FD 100HD 10FD 10HD autonegotiation Total Rx ERROR Packets = 0
Ethernet (MAC) address: 08:00:66:80:44:09 Total Tx Packets = 196164
Setup: Type: UTP MII address: Defer Xmission Count =0
Carrier Lost Count =0
Auto negotiation, capabilities: Out Of Window Collissions = 0
10 MBit Half Duplex Collisions Count =0
10 MBit Full Duplex Excess Collisions Count = 0
100 MBit Half Duplex Transmit FIFO underrun = 0
Receive FIFO overrun =0
100 MBit Full Duplex
Fixed (no negotiation)
10 Mbit HALF DUPLEX
Warning: changes become active immediately !!!

Save settings to file (only enable this after a test)
OK Factory Defaults Clear Counters

Repair and Service
HOME HELP Logging
Current Log File

S13
Show Log file
Set Log Levels
TaskLog Level
NipOpImage ERROR NipOpImage implements following operations: scaling/filtering, lookup and rotation.
DCMPrintToPrintJob ERROR DCMPrintToPrintJob converts Dicom Printjob into printqueue job
PrintJobHandler ERROR PrintJobHandler is listener for jobavailable events and converts the available jobs in a bitmap for printing.
ColorConvertOpImage ERROR ColorConvertOpImage implements the conversion from one ColorSpace to another
PAGE ERROR 'Page' calculates the position of imageboxes in a page
DCMIBCodec ERROR
DrawableRI ERROR
ComposeOpImage ERROR ComposeOpImage implements the operation to Compose multiple source images into one image
CropOpImage ERROR CropOpImage creates a new image out of the region of interest of the source image.
TiledImage ERROR TiledImage transfers images to/from disk
CMM ERROR CMM (Color Management Module) converts image data from one colorspace to another and manages colorspace data
LPD ERROR Line Printer Daemon : A group of hosts requests services from a LPD running on a host. The services provided by the process are related to printing jobs.
BorderOpImage ERROR BorderOpImage implements the border operation (e.g. trim)
PrintQueueEditor ERROR This is the UI component of the printqueue (browser & keypad)
JobQueue ERROR Non Persistent Queue. (Version : 2.03)
JobProvider ERROR JobProvider is a printqueue consumer that publishes available jobs to the subscribers.
NipOpImage2 ERROR implements following operations: scaling/filtering, lookup and rotation.
AuthenticationManager ERROR Secure Access Management: Authentication Manager for accessing URLs and keypad menus
QueueFactory ERROR Starts the requested (or available) queue. (Version : 2.01)
VolatileTiledImage ERROR
PrintQueue_Management ERROR Version 1.03 : Monitors the printqueue. Arrange communication between printqueue and several protocols.
XML ERROR
TranslateOpImage ERROR
PFE ERROR The Printer Front End receives printjobs from a network (DICOM LPD) or any proprietary interface (MFRI, VSI) and composes a printable bitmap to be printed by the Printer Back End.
PSCodec ERROR PSCodec (de)codes postscript/pdf files
FontRI ERROR
MfxPrinterInfoHandler ERROR Mfx is an Agfa communication protocol to interchange printer status messages
Raster ERROR
OverlayOpImage ERROR OverlayOpImage implements the operation to put an overlay above the source image.
CFG ERROR CFG handles configuration issues such as profiles, browser GUI, ...
DCMPrintSCP-0 ERROR Dicom Print Service Class Provider on port 104 for DS5300 application.Handles incoming Dicom association requests for print services and prepares internal print jobs for them V5300
FontCache ERROR
Configure the Logger

NO
Log to Console
Log to File NO
Max number of log directories to keep
Max number of log pages (files) per directory
Timestamp in date format YES
Add timestamp to console loggings NO
Logging to Plog logbox at level
Submit Factory Defaults
5365_100_3701.cdr
Page 6

Repair and Service
6 Difference Key-Operator and Service Command Session in SW Rel. 1.9

Key-Operator Menu Service Menu

Key-Operator - Calibration Service - Calibration

1. Film Calibration 1. Film Calibration
2. Therm. Head clean 2. Internal Densitometer Calibration
3. Print Head Calibration
Go back
Go back
7 Welcome to this 7.1 Welcome to this 7 Welcome to this 7.1 Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Service actions Key-Operator - Service actions Service - Service actions

Key-Operator - Service actions
1. Error Messages 1. Maintenance settings 1. Maintenance
2. Warning Messages 2. Pending maintenance actions
7.1 1. Maintenance settings
2. Errors 2. Pending maintenance actions
3. Repair history 3. Closed maintenance actions 3. Warnings 3. Closed maintenance actions
4. Maintenance 7.1 4. Repair history
5. Logging
Go back Go back
Go back Go back
Welcome to this
Welcome to this
Service - Service actions
Maintenance Action Cycles Factory Current Active Reset Item
Key-Operator - Service actions to go settings settings
MAINTENANCE SETTINGS
Reset Item Cycles to go Factory settings Y Y
Thermal head cleaning required 5000 5000 5000 N N
Thermal head cleaning required 4841 5000
Y Y
Replace thermal head anti dust filter 24841 25000 Replace thermal head anti dust filter 25000 25000 25000 N N
Replace thermal head (end of life) 62500 62500
62500 Y Y
Replace input film pickup rollers 39841 40000 Replace thermal head (end of life) 62500 62500 N N
Film calibration required 500 5000 Y Y
Film calibration upper tray required 4898 5000 5000
N N
Go back 5000 5000 Y Y
Film calibration lower tray required 5000
N N
5000 5000 5000 Y Y
Service maintenance required N N
Accept Changes Discard Changes Reset Values
5365_100_3701.cdr
9 Welcome to this 9 Welcome to this Page 7
Key-Operator - Print image Service - Print image

1. Ktbwd2n.zip
1. LinCheck.zip
2. smpte_kan.zip
2 .STI1.zip
3. smpte_l300.zip
3. STI2.zip
4. smpte_lin.zip
4. medical_image.zip
5. tpa.zip
Based on SW Rel. 1.8 Go back

Go back

Repair and Service
Key-Operator Menu Service Menu
2.2 Welcome to this

2.2 Welcome to this
Service - Change input tray settings
If RF-tag is missing or malfunctioning
Key-Operator - Change input tray settings
Printing with Dmax=2.00
Upper input tray Printing not possible
Normal Upper input tray
Film view
Back Film view Normal
Tag film format 14x17" Back
11x14" Overruling to film format 14x17"
14x14" 11x14"
10x12" 14x14"
Tag film type DT2B 10x12"
Tag film type DT2B
Drystar DT2C Overruling to film type Drystar DT2B
Lower input tray
Film view Normal

Back

11x14"
14x14"
10x12"
Tag film type DT2B

Drystar DT2C

DD+DIS150.05E Software releases, patches
Chapter 3.8:
List of contents
1 Software Release 1.8.0_C1 ....................................... 1

1.1 Supported features.................................................................. 1
1.2 Limitations ............................................................................... 1

DD+DIS150.05E Software releases, patches
1 Software Release 1.8.0_C1

• Software Release 1.8.0_C1 is the first released Drystar 5302
software.
• It was released 09/2005.
1.1 Supported features

All features as specified in the FRS (Functional Requirement Specifications),
i.e.
• Printing diagnostic data according to the DICOM standard with a
resolution of 320dpi.
• Printing on Drystar film material DT2B and DT2C.
• Supporting film sizes 8x10", 10x14", 14x14", 11"x14" and 14"x17".
• Support of the new thermal model TMML, commercial name "A#sharp".
1.2 Limitations
• User Interface screens are only available in Dutch, English, French,
German, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish
language.
• RF tag overrule functionality (printing with Dmax = 2.0 O.D.) not yet
implemented
• Only Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher is usable as browser
application.
1.3 Known Problems

• In case the Online Diagnosis detects that the Output Module is defective
and has to be exchanged, it does not display "MOD 06 - Please replace
module" but "E06 - Please replace module"
• The Module pages in the Service Engineer Tools are not yet operational
• In case a film jam happens with last film in a package, the printer does
not show "empty film tray" but continues printing with the "protective
cover", what leads to jam with the protective cover.
• Automatic film calibration fails in case of a pending maintenance action.

Chapter 3.9
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5364 / 100/300
► Please note
The Chapter ‘FAQ’, Edition 1, Revision 0, has been replaced by the separately
available Troubleshooting Guide, DD+DIS154.08E
Please download the Troubleshooting Guide from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Æ Hardcopy Æ Dry Imagers Æ Drystar 5302 Æ Trouble shooting guide

08/2008 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 26032589
eq_03-9_faq_e_template_v05
Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions


08/2008 Type 5366/100 Agfa Company Confidential
DD+DIS150.05E Reference and Overall Circuit Diagrams
List of Contents
1 Reference Diagrams ..................................................................1
1.1 Components Location ............................................................................... 1

2 Circuit Diagrams
Circuit Diagram Main Page (Diagram 1/7)
Lower Pickup Assembly (Diagram 2/7)
Lower Tray Assembly (Diagram 3/7)
Output Assembly (Diagram 4/7)
Pump & Valves Assembly (Diagram 5/7)
Upper Pickup Assembly (Diagram 6/7)
Upper Tray (Diagram 7/7)

Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 4 / I
1 Reference Diagrams
1.1 Components Location
Component Name Refer to Component Name Refer to Component Name Refer to
CDM Contactless Densitometer PCB Figure 1 RF2 RF tag reader lower tray Figure 1 S26 Vacuum sensor Figure 1
cdmLED Densitometer LED PCB Figure 1 S1 Upper magazine empty detection Figure 1 Themis3 PCB CPU board. Operating System. Figure 2
Control Board: Input/Output and film
Devil PCB Figure 2 S2 Lower magazine empty detection Figure 1 TPH Thermal print head Figure 1
control
E1 E label Devil CPU -- S3 Transport roller open detection Figure 1 V1 Vacuum valve upper magazine Figure 1
E2 E label Output Module -- S4 Input Sensor TPH Figure 1 V2 Vacuum valve lower magazine Figure 1
E3 E label Lower Pickup Module -- S5 Output sensor TPH Figure 1
E4 E label Power Supply -- S6 Output rollers home position Figure 1
E5 E label TPH module -- S7 TPH home position Figure 1
E6 E label 6 Display Module -- S8 Top cover closed detection Figure 1
E7 E label 7 Upper Pickup Module -- S9 Print drum drive rotation detection Figure 1
F1 Thermal Head fan Figure 1 S10 Densitometer home position Figure 1
F2 CPU cooling fan (E-box) Figure 1 S11 Take over passed detection Figure 1
Hard disk
Hard disk Drive 73 GB (or more) Figure 1 S12 Overheat sensor Figure 1
Drive
KEY6 PCB Keypad module Figure 2 S13 Input sensor TPH Figure 1
M1 Drum motor Figure 1 S14 Upper pickup home position Figure 1
M2 Cam drive motor Figure 1 S15 Upper pickup pickup position Figure 1
M3 Suspension drive motor Figure 1 S16 Lower pickup home position Figure 1
M4 Output rollers motor Figure 1 S17 Lower pickup pickup position Figure 1
M5 CDM Motor Figure 1 S18 Upper pickup passed position Figure 1
M6 Upper Pickup motor Figure 1 S19 Lower pickup passed position Figure 1
M7 Lower Pickup motor Figure 1 S20 Take over film transport detection Figure 1
M8 Gear Box motor Figure 1 S21 10" suspension position Figure 1
M9 Vacuum pump Figure 1 S22 14" suspension position Figure 1
OSB Switch Board for TH resistors Figure 2 S23 Jam clearance switch Figure 1
Power Supply Power Supply Figure 2 S24 Take over passed detection Figure 1
RF1 RF tag reader upper tray Figure 1 S25 Output sensor Figure 1

Reference and Overall Circuit Diagrams DD+DIS150.05E
M6 in Upper pickup tray

CDM LED Board M7 in Lower pickup tray S14 / S15 in Upper pickup tray
S16 / S17 in Lower pickup tray
S6
S25
CDM S5
M4
S18 in Upper pickup tray
F1 S19 in Lower pickup tray
M5
S8
S10
S7
S21
S13 S22
M2
M3
S4
S 1 in upper tray
S2 in lower tray
V1 V2 M9
S26
M1 S11
S24 S20
S12
S9 M8
F2
S3
536604aa_1.cdr
RF1 in Upper Tray

RF2 in Lower Tray
Figure 1

Section 4 / 2 Drystar 5302 Edition 1, Revison 0
Component Name Refer to Component Name Refer to Component Name Refer to

CDM Contactless Densitometer PCB Figure 1 RF2 RF tag reader lower tray Figure 1 S26 Vacuum sensor Figure 1
cdmLED Densitometer LED PCB Figure 1 S1 Upper magazine empty detection Figure 1 Themis3 PCB CPU board Figure 2
Control Board: Input/Output and
Devil PCB Figure 2 S2 Lower magazine empty detection Figure 1 TPH Thermal print head Figure 1
TPH control
E1 E label Devil CPU -- S3 Transport roller open detection Figure 1 V1 Vacuum valve upper magazine Figure 1
E2 E label Output Module -- S4 Input Sensor TPH Figure 1 V2 Vacuum valve lower magazine Figure 1
E3 E label Lower Pickup Module -- S5 Output sensor TPH Figure 1
E4 E label Power Supply -- S6 Output rollers home position Figure 1
E5 E label TPH module -- S7 TPH home position Figure 1
E6 E label 6 Display Module -- S8 Top cover closed detection Figure 1
E7 E label 7 Upper Pickup Module -- S9 Print drum drive rotation detection Figure 1
F1 Thermal Head fan Figure 1 S10 Densitometer home position Figure 1
F2 CPU cooling fan (E-box) Figure 1 S11 Take over passed detection Figure 1
Hard disk
Hard disk Drive 73 GB (or more) Figure 1 S12 Overheat sensor Figure 1
Drive
KEY6 PCB Keypad module Figure 2 S13 Input sensor TPH Figure 1
M1 Drum motor Figure 1 S14 Upper pickup home position Figure 1
M2 Cam drive motor Figure 1 S15 Upper pickup pickup position Figure 1
M3 Suspension drive motor Figure 1 S16 Lower pickup home position Figure 1
M4 Output rollers motor Figure 1 S17 Lower pickup pickup position Figure 1
M5 CDM Motor Figure 1 S18 Upper pickup passed position Figure 1
M6 Upper Pickup motor Figure 1 S19 Lower pickup passed position Figure 1
M7 Lower Pickup motor Figure 1 S20 Take over film transport detection Figure 1
M8 Gear Box motor Figure 1 S21 10" suspension position Figure 1
M9 Vacuum pump Figure 1 S22 14" suspension position Figure 1
OSB Switch Board for TH resistors Figure 2 S23 Jam clearance switch Figure 1
Power Supply Power Supply Figure 2 S24 Take over passed detection Figure 1
RF1 RF tag reader upper tray Figure 1 S25 Output sensor Figure 1

Reference and Overall Circuit Diagrams DD+DIS150.05E
OSB
Power Supply
Devil
TPH
Themis
Key6
536604aa_2.cdr
Figure 2

Section 4 / 4 Drystar 5302 Edition 1, Revison 0
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
A343882. THERMAL HEAD ASSY X

X
OS-5101-H X X A340530.0 NAIS AGX226
X X
Sensor-S4 X (Matsushita)
Overheat
X
X A340419. 3
2
3
S4
+XS5aXS5:3
RD
VT
EE-SX4009-P1
Sensor-S7
X
X
S7
X
2 +XS5aXS5:2 1 RD
sensor A5
CABLED HEATER FOIL (ELE) 1
1
BU3-EI
+XS5aXS5:1
BK
2
3
1
2
DEV/P1:36
DEV/P1:35
BK
VT
X
S8
3 DEV/P1:34 X X
BN 1 3 BU BU3-EI X X
X X
S8/7 S8/8
1/1 7 8 1/1
X +XS5a +XS5b
X Input sensor TPH BK
XS5 XS5 BK
6.3mm isolation (clear)
3 4
6.3mm isolation (clear)
S4:1 1 1 DEV/P1:26
TPH home position
Thermal Print Head
12 VT VT 12
S4:2 2 2 DEV/P1:25
Sensor-S12
RD
S4:3 3 3 DEV/P1:27
RD Top cover closed detection
BK BK
S13:1 4 4 DEV/P1:32
VT VT
S13:2 5 5 DEV/P1:31
1
2
RD RD
S13:3 6 6 DEV/P1:33
VT BK
+XS5aXS5:8 7 7 DEV/P1:15
X A344559. WIRE HARNESS ASSY VT
+XS5aXS5:7 8 8 DEV/P1:14
VT
X
X X A339844. X (BRACKET) ST8-EI BU8-EI
2 +5V common
P325189
X +TPH TPH
*50/50
+TPH
+TPH
10/10
IFE#5 ST1
1/10
2/10
3/10
4/10
5/10
6/10
7/10
8/10
9/10
A000000. Thermal Head Assembly
+TPH
X
P3
P1
OG 1/4
X
BL11
1 +5V
P2
+XS4aXS4:7 1 X
X
RD 2/4
+XS4aXS4:8 2 OS-5101-H X X
BK 3/4 X /Output_asm.3H
+XS4aXS4:9 3
X
X
JST VH connector JST VH connector Sensor-S13
TH/P2
WH S13
*50/50
10/10
1/10
2/10
3/10
4/10
5/10
6/10
7/10
8/10
9/10
4/4 X
BU50-IDC-1
X
X
X
TH/P3
TH/P1
+XS4aXS4:10 4
ST4-MO53261-SMD +TPH 156" board-in 156" board-in 3
3 +XS5aXS5:6
RD A344551. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (OUTPUT) XS2 & XS3
BU4-51021 X crimp style 10pos. crimp style 2pos. 2 VT
2 +XS5aXS5:5
BN
BU
RD
RD
A6 1 BK
X 1 +XS5aXS5:4
< open wire end >

< open wire end >
BU3-EI
Sensor-S12:1
Sensor-S12:3
PS/P3:11
PS/P3:12
eLabel pcb Address #5 Input sensor TPH
ST5-MINI-FIT-JR BU5-MINI-FIT-JR
11 11
BK
RD
XS6b
A344546. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (ENGINE)

X
X
1 1
2 2
4 4
5 5
A343030. S4 BRACKET ASM
X
X
XS6a
WH
WH
WH
BN
BN
BN
OG
OG
BU
BU
BU
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
OSB/P6:4
OSB/P6:3
OSB/P6:2
OSB/P6:1
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
YE
+XS2aXS2:13
+XS2aXS2:11
+XS2aXS2:12
+XS2aXS2:14
+XS2aXS2:10
+XS3aXS3:20
+XS3aXS3:19
+XS3aXS3:18
+XS3aXS3:16
+XS3aXS3:17
+XS3aXS3:15
+XS2aXS2:19
+XS3aXS3:22
+XS3aXS3:10
+XS3aXS3:13
+XS3aXS3:11
+XS3aXS3:12
+XS3aXS3:14
+XS5bXS5:8
+XS5bXS5:7
+XS5bXS5:2
+XS5bXS5:1
+XS5bXS5:3
+XS5bXS5:5
+XS5bXS5:4
+XS5bXS5:6
+XS2aXS2:9
+XS2aXS2:7
+XS2aXS2:8
+XS2aXS2:6
+XS2aXS2:5
+XS2aXS2:4
+XS2aXS2:2
+XS2aXS2:1
+XS2aXS2:3
+XS3aXS3:1
+XS3aXS3:2
+XS3aXS3:3
+XS3aXS3:4
+XS3aXS3:5
+XS3aXS3:6
+XS3aXS3:7
+XS3aXS3:9
+XS3aXS3:8
S8/7:1
S8/8:1
S7:3
S7:2
S7:1
A345385. TH POWER CABLE
DEV/P1:38
DEV/P1:37
X
BN
BU
/Upper_pickup.3F
RD
RD
TPH fan XS1
BU40-90142
BU16-90142
DEV/P1
DEV/P9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
+12V
+5V
+5V
ODM_I_SEL_B_BF
ODM_M_SEL_B_BF
ODM_I_SEL_A_BF
ODM_M_SEL_A_BF
P_24V
P_24V
ODM_BL_CTRL_BF
-12V
EL_SDA_LINE1
EL_SCL_LINE1
JAM_CLEAR
SDA
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
DC_OUTB5
DC_OUTB4
DC_OUTA5
DC_OUTA4
SCL
VOS
VOS
VOS
VOS
VOS
VOS
VOS
VOS
ODM_COUNT
DIG_SENSOR18
DIG_SENSOR17
DIG_SENSOR21
DIG_SENSOR13
DIG_SENSOR5
DIG_SENSOR7
DIG_SENSOR6
DIG_SENSOR4
DIG_SENSOR9
+DEV1
+DEV1
CURR_DIG_SENSOR18
CURR_DIG_SENSOR17
CURR_DIG_SENSOR21
CURR_DIG_SENSOR5
CURR_DIG_SENSOR7
CURR_DIG_SENSOR6
CURR_DIG_SENSOR4
SAFETY_OK
M
ST40-90130
ST16-90130
P1
P9
X
X
10 10
X X
A329002.1 +DEV1 X
X P40 DEV/P40 BK
F1 1 GND 1 DEV/P40:2
2
A347112. OSB-HEATER CABLE
BK
X A344555.0 2 DIG_SENSOR31(CCP40) 2 DEV/P40:1
X X X 3 DC_OUTA12
X +DEV1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DEV/P14 P14 4 DC_OUTB12
GY
*50/50 *50/50 5 DC_OUTA11 5 +XS10bXS10:5
BN
OSB1
BU50-IDC-1 P325189 6 DC_OUTB11 6 +XS10bXS10:6
I/O 4 CDM
BU
RD
WH X
TPH DATA CABLE TH 7 DC_OUTA10 7 +XS10bXS10:3
BN
/Lower_pickup.3F
8 DC_OUTB10 8 +XS10bXS10:4
A329002.1:2
A329002.1:1
X X 9 DC_OUTA9 9 +XS10bXS10:1
BU XS4
+OSB1 BN
X 10 DC_OUTB9 10 +XS10bXS10:2
OSB/P6 P6 11 DC_OUTA8 11 +XS4aXS4:2
RD
RD 1/4 BK
BU2-MINI-FIT-JR
XS6a:5 1 12 DC_OUTB8 12 +XS4aXS4:1

RD 2/4 X X RD
XS6a:4 2 X +DEV1 13 DC_OUTA7 13 +XS1aXS1:2
BU 3/4 BK
XS6a:2 3 DEV/P41 P41
Fan-F1
BN BK 14 DC_OUTB7 14 +XS1aXS1:1
4/4
+ - BU
10
XS6a:1 4 DEV/P41:2 1 GND 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 SWITCH_FET_STATUS_I_GND 9
P316801 BK 15 M3_A2 15 +XS13aXS13:5
X
X
RD
DEVIL ONE
2 2
1 1
BU4-MINI-FIT-JR DEV/P41:1 2 DIG_SENSOR30(CCP21) 2 16 M3_A1 16 +XS13aXS13:4

BN WH
10 SWITCH_FET_STATUS_I
F1
X
X
+XS11bXS11:1 3 GND 3
ST2-MINI-FIT-JR
1 CURR_DIG_SENSOR14
17 M3_B2 17 +XS13aXS13:7
X
.1 S27 obsolete BK
+XS11bXS11:2 4 XX2 4 YE
7 SWITCH_FETB_ACT
5 SWITCH_FETA_ACT
9 X VT 18 M3_B1 18 +XS13aXS13:6 9
BU
2 DIG_SENSOR14
X +XS13aXS13:10 5 DIG_SENSOR29 5 19 M8_A2 19 +XS12aXS12:1

ST10-90130
P316768
P316768
BK
(Devil 3 run)
+OSB1
+OSB1
OSB1 +XS13aXS13:9 6 CURR_DIG_SENSOR29 6 RD
+OSB1
A339406. OSB1 pcb RD 20 M8_A1 20 +XS12aXS12:2

WH
1/1
1/1
P2
P3
+XS13aXS13:8 7 VOS 7 X
LED functions on Themis
X
BL19 21 M8_B2 21 +XS12aXS12:3 /Pump_&_Valves_asm.2E
P1
VT
6 GND
8 GND
YE
DEV/P20:8
DEV/P20:7
+XS13aXS13:3 8 DIG_SENSOR28 8 22 M8_B1 22 +XS12aXS12:4

X
X
BK
RD
+XS13aXS13:2 9 CURR_DIG_SENSOR28 9 23 DC_OUTA6 23 F2:1
RD XS10
BU10-90142
D1, D7, D10 (yellow) Software controllable LED's.

X
X
BU
OSB/P1
+XS13aXS13:1 10 VOS 10 24 DC_OUTB6 24 F2:2

BK D2 2,5V (green) V25 =2,5V for MPC107 Host Bridge and FPGA. VT
+XS12aXS12:5 11 CURR_DIG_SENSOR0 11
1/1
1/1
X
X
X
X
25 CURR_DIG_SENSOR3 25 +XS1aXS1:14
RING-TERM-2.5-3.6
RING-TERM-2.5-3.6
OSB/P2
OSB/P3
VT
BU
RD
RD
+XS12aXS12:6 12 DIG_SENSOR0 12 D3 VCORE (green) VCORE = CPU Core Voltage. 26 GND
VT
+XS12aXS12:7 13 VOS 13 D5 3,3V (green) V33 =3,3V for most logic onboard. 27 VOS
+XS12aXS12:8 14 DIG_SENSOR2 14 VT
D8 +5V (green) VCC =5V for remaining logic. 28 DIG_SENSOR24 28 +XS4aXS4:5
DEV/P41:33
DEV/P41:32
DEV/P41:18
DEV/P41:20
DEV/P41:22
DEV/P41:24
DEV/P41:19
DEV/P41:17
BK
+XS12aXS12:9 15 CURR_DIG_SENSOR2 15 D4 CS1 (yellow) Chip Select for PortX bus. 29 CURR_DIG_SENSOR24
RD
+XS12aXS12:10 16 VOS 16 30 VOS
GY D9 CS0 (yellow) Chip Select for PortX bus. BK
OSB/P1:10 17 SWITCH_FET_STATUS_I 17 31 GND 31 +XS1aXS1:9
BN D6 FPGAconf. (red) FPGA Configuration done. When lit, FPGA is NOT configured --> ALARM. OG
A344546. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (ENGINE) BK
OSB/P1:5 18 SWITCH_FETA_ACT 18 32 EL_SDA_LINE1 32 +XS1aXS1:7
BN
BK
BK
BU
BK
BK
D11 CPU (yellow) CPU Bus Grant - indicates CPU activity on the Bus.
I/O 3
VT
GY
OSB/P1:9 19 SWITCH_FET_STATUS_I_GND19 RD
BK 33 +5V 33 +XS1aXS1:8
OSB/P1:6 20 GND 20 WH
34 EL_SCL_LINE1 34 +XS1aXS1:10
UP_SPARE3 21 ST34-90130 BU34-90142 X
BU /Pump_&_Valves_asm.4E

X OSB/P1:7 22 SWITCH_FETB_ACT 22
X BK
UP_SPARE2 23
X X XS11
M1 OSB/P1:8 24 GND 24 +DEV1 X
VT
8 X X PK243-01A BK
+XS4aXS4:6 25 DIG_SENSOR23 25 P20 DEV/P20 BK
8
X X Motor-M1 +XS4aXS4:3 26 CURR_DIG_SENSOR23 26 1 GND 1 DEV/P20:2
M1 RD BK
BK
M1 VT
+XS4aXS4:4 27 VOS 27 2 DIG_SENSOR20(CCP) 2 DEV/P20:1
BK
DEV/P20:3 1 1/8 BK +XS1aXS1:5 28 DIG_SENSOR22 28 3 STEP_SINA 3 M1:1
2/8
3/8
YE M BK
RD
+XS1aXS1:3
+XS1aXS1:4
29
30
CURR_DIG_SENSOR22
VOS
29
30
4
5
STEP_SINB
STEP_COSA
4
5
M1:4
M1:5
GN
RD
GN 4/8 GN BU
DEV/P20:4 4 UP_SPARE1 31 6 STEP_COSB 6 M1:8
X RD 5/8 VT RD
DEV/P20:5 5 OSB/P1:2 32 DIG_SENSOR14 32 7 DC_OUTA1_F 7 F1:1
X
Motor 24VDC
6/8
7/8
BK
OSB/P1:1 33 CURR_DIG_SENSOR14 33 I/O 5 8 DC_OUT1_F 8 F1:2
BU
RD
Motor-M2 X BU34-90142 VOS 34 9 VOS 9 +XS4aXS4:11
X BU 8/8 BK
DEV/P20:6 8 RD WH BU ST34-90130 10 DIG_SENSOR10 10 +XS4aXS4:13
RD
M2 RD BU8-5102-N
ST8-5240
11 DIG_SENSOR1 11 +XS4aXS4:12
VT
1
M BK
BU
2
3
1
2
DEV/P20:23
DEV/P20:24
BK 12
13
GND
+5V
OG 4 OG 14 DC_ENC4
4 DEV/P20:18
YE 5 YE 15 DC_OUTB3
5 DEV/P20:22
BU 6 BU 16 DC_OUTA3
6 DEV/P20:20 X X
X +DEV1 17 DC_ENC3
ST6-EI OG
X BK
DEV/P42 P42 18 +5V 18 M2:4
DEV/P42:2 1 GND 1 19 +5V
X BK BU
X DEV/P42:1 2 DIG_SENSOR32(CCP42) 2 20 GND 20 M2:6
7 EE-SX4009-P1 BK 7
TPH positioning motor X
S9 Sensor-S9
+XS12aXS12:11 3 DIG_SENSOR33 3 21 GND
YE
RD 1 NC 4 22 DC_ENC2 22 M2:5
DEV/P20:40 1 VT RD
BK 2 +XS12aXS12:12 5 DIG_SENSOR33 5 23 DC_OUTA2 23 M2:1
DEV/P20:39 2 BK BK
VT 3 +XS13aXS13:12 6 DIG_SENSOR34 6 24 DC_OUTB2 24 M2:2
DEV/P20:38 3 VOS 7 25 GND
BU3-EI VT VT
+XS13aXS13:11 8 DIG_SENSOR34 8 26 DIG_SENSOR10 26 +XS4aXS4:14
X
CURR_DIG_SENSOR34 9 27 VOS
A344554. TPH POWER CABLE
X
X VOS 10 28 VOS
EE-SX4009-P1 VT
X CURR_DIG_SENSOR35 11 29 DIG_SENSOR19 29 +XS1aXS1:6
RD
S21 1
Sensor-S21 Print drum drive DIG_SENSOR35 12 30 CURR_DIG_SENSOR19
+XS13bXS13:1 1 OG
BK 2 VOS 13 31 EL_SDA_LINE0 31 +XS4aXS4:7
+XS13bXS13:2 2 BK
VT 3 DOG_SENSOR36 14 32 GND 32 +XS4aXS4:9
+XS13bXS13:3 3 WH
CURR_DIG_SENSOR36 15 33 EL_SCL_LINE0 33 +XS4aXS4:10
BU3-EI RD
VOS 16 34 +5V 34 +XS4aXS4:8
VT
X X DIG_SENSOR37 17 35 DIG_SENSOR3 35 +XS1aXS1:12
BK
+XS13a +XS13b CURR_DIG_SENSOR37 18 36 CURR_DIG_SENSOR3 36 +XS1aXS1:13
XS13 XS13 RD
BU
RD
RD RD VOS 19 37 VOS 37 +XS1aXS1:11

DEV/P41:10 1 1 S21:1 10" suspension position DIG_SENSOR38 20 38 DIG_SENSOR16 38 S9:3
VT
BK BK
I/O 1 BK
DEV/P40:24
DEV/P40:23
DEV/P41:9 2 2 S21:2 CURR_DIG_SENSOR38 21 39 CURR_DIG_SENSOR16 39 S9:2
Key6
VT VT RD
DEV/P41:8 3 3 S21:3 VOS 22 40 VOS 40 S9:1
RD RD
DEV/P40:16 4 4 M3:3 X NC 23 ST40-90130 BU40-90142
6 BU BU 6
DEV/P40:15 5 5 M3:5 X DIG_SENSOR39 24
YE YE
WH
DEV/P40:18
DEV/P40:17
6
7
6
7
M3:7
M3:9
WH X
X
1
KH42KM2-851
Motor-M3
CURR_DIG_SENSOR39
VOS
25
26
I/O 6
RD RD 2
A347061. WIRE HARNESS ASSY
ST2-EI
X X
DEV/P41:7 8 8 S22:1 M3 ST26-90130

F2
BK BK RD 3 A +DEV1 X
M
X
X
DEV/P41:6 9 9 S22:2 +XS13bXS13:4 3

2 2
1 1
VT VT (SPRING EXT.) 4 P21 DEV/P21

DEV/P41:5 10 10 S22:3 LED functions on VILIS BK
X
X
BU2-EI
Fan-F2
VT BK BU 5 A 1 GND 1 DEV/P21:2
DEV/P42:8 11 11 +XS13bXS13:12 +XS13bXS13:5 5 BK
BK BK 6 2 DIG_SENSOR12(CCP21) 2 DEV/P21:1
DEV/P42:6 12 12 +XS13bXS13:11 BK GND
YE 7 D5 +3V3 (green) When lit, 3,3V Supply Voltage ok. 3 GND 3 +XS9aXS9:4
WH
ST12-70107 BU12-70066 +XS13bXS13:6 7 B B D18 +5V (green) When lit, 5V Supply Voltage ok. 4 RFID_TXD_RS 4 +XS9aXS9:6 RFID_TXD_RS
8 RD +5V
D9 P_24V (green) When lit, +24V Supply Voltage ok. 5 +5V 5 +XS9aXS9:5
A344567.0:2
A344567.0:1
WH 9 YE
+XS13bXS13:7 9 6 RFID_RXD_RS 6 +XS9aXS9:7 RFID_RXD_RS
11p PH 10 X D10 +12V (green) When lit, +12V Supply Voltage ok.
11 7 GND
X D17 -12V (green) When lit, -12V Supply Voltage ok. BU RFID_RST_RS
X 8 RFID_RST_RS 8 +XS9aXS9:8
D12 IMGCTRL_CONFDONE FPGA Configuration done. 9 GND 9 +XS7aXS7:4,+XS7aXS7:12
BK, VT GND
/Upper_tray.4F
Suspension motor (yellow) When lit, FPGA is NOT configured --> ALARM. WH RFIDB_TXD_RS
BU
RD
10 RFIDB_TXD_RS 10 +XS7aXS7:6
D14 UP_LED0 (yellow) Software controllable LED. RD +5V (filtered)
11 +5V (filtered) 11 +XS7aXS7:5
X YE RFIDB_RXD_RS
D15 UP_LED1 (yellow) Software controllable LED. 12 RFIDB_RXD_RS 12 +XS7aXS7:7
X A344556.0 13 GND
X X X X BU
F2 +KEY6 X X +DEV1 14 RFIDB_RST_RS 14 +XS7aXS7:8 RFIDB_RST_RS
2
X X P2 key/P2 DEV/P8 P8 D1 NTRAFFIC (yellow) Network activity. BK GND

15 GND 15 +XS7aXS7:11
X A344567.0 *40/40 *40/40 *40/40 *40/40 D2 NGOOD_LINK (yellow) Network connected. VT XX1 5
5 X 16 XX1 16 +XS8aXS8:10
EE-SX4009-P1 P337808 BU40-IDC-1 BU40-IDC-1 P333509 VT
RD
S22
X
1
Sensor-S22 M DISPLAY CABLE
D3
D4
100MBIT_SPEED (yellow)
IMGCTRL_0 (yellow)
High Speed Network activity (>100Mbit/s)
Software controllable LED.
17
18
DIG_SENSOR25 17
CURR_DIG_SENSOR25 18
+XS8aXS8:5
+XS8aXS8:4
BK
DIG_SENSOR25
CURR_DIG_SENSOR25
/Upper_tray.2F
BK
+XS13bXS13:8 1
2
KEY D13 IMGCTRL_1 (yellow) Software controllable LED. 19 VOS 19 +XS8aXS8:6
RD VOS
+XS13bXS13:9 2 20 A_SPARE2
VT
+XS13bXS13:10 3
3 E-box cooling fan D16 IDE_DASP (yellow) IDE activity.
21 EL_SDA_LINE0
1
2
3
4
BU3-EI D19 CP_ACT_LED (yellow) Disk activity controlled by PORTEX.

22 GND
23 EL_SCL_LINE0
X
24 +5V
A344550.
X
14" suspension position X 25 GND WIRE HARNESS ASSY (CASS ASM)
KEY6 26 EL_SDA_LINE1
P337795
+KEY6
A337163.
27 +5V
+12V
+12V
BL10
+5V
P3
GND
X
28 EL_SCL_LINE1
X X VT
1
2
3
4
X +DEV1 BK
X
X
Key/P3
A343217. SPRING EXTENSIONER (SUS)

BU4-MICFITG1
DEV/P13 P13 30 CURR_DIG_SENSOR15 30 +XS8aXS8:1 DIG_SENSOR15

WH
BU
RD
RD
RD
RD
BK
BK
BK
VT
VT
VT
YE
*68/68 *68/68 31 VOS 31 +XS8aXS8:3 CURR_DIG_SENSOR15

/Upper_tray.2F
ST2x34-AMPLIMITE P316661 32 A_SPARE1 VOS
A3429150. HDD CABLE
DEV/P40:19
DEV/P40:20
DEV/P40:21
DEV/P40:22
DEV/P41:11
DEV/P41:12
DEV/P41:13
DEV/P41:14
DEV/P41:15
DEV/P41:16
DEV/P42:3
DEV/P42:5
BK /Upper_tray.2F
33 GND 33 +XS9aXS9:11
SCSI I/O 2 34 XX3 34 +XS9aXS9:12
VT
GND
DEV/P11:17
DEV/P11:18
BK
DEV/P11:3
DEV/P11:6
35 CURR_DIG_SENSOR26 35 +XS9aXS9:3 XX3

(Cassette) 36 DIG_SENSOR26 36 +XS9aXS9:2
VT
CURR_DIG_SENSOR26
RD 4
4 CONTROL POWER
ST12-70107
37 VOS 37 +XS9aXS9:1
BK
38 CURR_DIG_SENSOR27 38 +XS7aXS7:3
XS12
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
VT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BK
BK
RD
YE
10
11
12
X X
RD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
40 VOS 40 +XS7aXS7:1 DIG_SENSOR26
POWER_SHUTDOWN_OC
+XS12b
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
/Lower_tray.4F
BU12-70066
XS12
X ST40-90130 BU40-90142 VOS
ST9-32WLP-SMD
ST14-MINI-FIT-JR
POWER_RESET_OC
+DEV1 CURR_DIG_SENSOR27
REM_ONOFF+
X
REM_ONOFF-
+DEV1
Devil1 DIG_SENSOR27
SERVICE
Power good
P329731
P333247
*11/11
3V3SENSEN
P328352
ETH CF SLAVE
+DEV1
+DEV1
5VSENSEN
+DEV1
+DEV1
Power fail
3V3SENSE
+XS12bXS12:12
+XS12bXS12:11
*50/50
A342951. PCB Assembly devil
5VSENSE
VOS
P3
/Upper_tray.4F
P24
P18
*8/8
P_24V
P_24V
+12V
+3V3
+3V3
+3V3
+12V
P15
P11
TxD+
X
BL5
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
RxD-
-12V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
X
X
X
IL
S20:2
S20:3
S20:1
M8:5
M8:3
M8:9
M8:7
17
18
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
19
20
21
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S3:3
S3:2
S3:1
BU14-MINI-FIT-JR
BU22-MINI-FIT-JR
X
X
X
X
DEV/P15
DEV/P11
X
External RS232 External Ethernet External Compact-Flash

BU
BK
BK
BK
BK
VT
VT
RD
RD
RD
WH
YE
X
RD
BK
BK
YE
PS/P1:17,Key/P3:1
PS/P1:18,Key/P3:2
X
X
EE-SX4009-P1 Service Port Connection Card Connection
Sensor-S20
PS/P1:17
PS/P1:18
PS/P1:6
PS/P1:3
S20
PS/P2:10
PS/P2:11
PS/P2:12
PS/P2:13
PS/P2:14
PS/P2:15
PS/P1:10
PS/P1:11
PS/P1:12
PS/P1:13
PS/P1:14
PS/P1:15
PS/P1:16
PS/P1:19
PS/P1:20
PS/P1:21
PS/P1:22
Key/P3:3
Key/P3:4
RD 1
PS/P2:1
PS/P2:2
PS/P2:3
PS/P2:4
PS/P2:5
PS/P2:6
PS/P2:7
PS/P2:9
PS/P1:1
PS/P1:2
PS/P1:4
PS/P1:5
PS/P1:7
PS/P1:8
PS/P1:9
+XS12bXS12:7 1
BK 2
ST2x34-AMPLIMITE
+XS12bXS12:5 2
VT 3
+XS12bXS12:6 3
BU3-EI
BN
BN
BN
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BU
BU
BU
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
VT
VT
RD
RD
RD
4p disk drive
GN
WH
WH
GY
GY
OG
OG
OG
*68/68
BK, BK
BU55
YE, YE
3 3
X
X
HD
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
X
Take over film transport detection
+12V
+5V
+Harddisk
GND
GND
+Harddisk
KH42KM2-851
*68/68
X
P316661
ST1
BU1
X
Motor-M8 1 X A344557. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (PS-DEV) A340645.0

2 X
M8 PS CONTROL CABLE
A 3 RD
M 4
3 +XS12bXS12:2
A347060. WIRE HARNESS ASSY
A 5 BU
5 +XS12bXS12:1
6
7 YE
1
2
3
4
B B 7 +XS12bXS12:4
(GEAR BOX)
RING-TERM-2.5-3.6
9 WH
Safety_Ground
9 +XS12bXS12:3
10 11p PH
BK, BK
YE, YE
GNYE
11
WH
WH
GN
BN
BN
BN
OG
OG
OG
BU
BU
BU
RD
RD
RD
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
GY
GY
VT
VT
1/1
Film transport motor
Safety_Ground:1
X
X
HD:4
HD:3
DEV/P15:10
DEV/P15:11
DEV/P15:12
DEV/P15:13
DEV/P15:14
DEV/P11:10
DEV/P11:11
DEV/P11:12
DEV/P11:13
DEV/P11:14
DEV/P11:15
DEV/P11:16
DEV/P11:19
DEV/P11:20
DEV/P11:21
DEV/P11:22
DEV/P15:1
DEV/P15:2
DEV/P15:3
DEV/P15:4
DEV/P15:5
DEV/P15:6
DEV/P15:7
DEV/P15:8
DEV/P15:9
DEV/P11:1
DEV/P11:2
DEV/P11:4
DEV/P11:5
DEV/P11:7
DEV/P11:8
DEV/P11:9
DEV/P11:17,HD:1
DEV/P11:18,HD:2
Omron EE-SX4009-P1 X
A339843. X
+PS
X
X
Mates with receptacle X P1 IFE#4
BU16-MINI-FIT-JR
BU22-MINI-FIT-JR
X 1/4 OG
AMP EI 3 pos. IDC EE-SX4009-P1 1 +XS4aXS4:7
2 X 2/4 RD 2
S3 Sensor-S3 2 +XS4aXS4:8
RD 1 3/4 BK
3 +XS4aXS4:9
PS/P2
PS/P1
+XS12bXS12:10 1 X 4/4 WH
BK 2 4 +XS4aXS4:10
+XS12bXS12:9 2
GND 10
GND 11
+5V 12
RxD- 13
TxD+ 14
GND 15
Prot. earth 16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
X
X
X
X
+PS ST4-MO53261-SMD
HARDDISK 18GB
REM_ONOFF+ 1
REM_ONOFF- 2
GND 3
POWER_RESET_OC 4
5 POWER_SHUTDOWN_OC 5
IL 6
P_24V 7
P_24V 9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
VT 3 BU4-51021
+XS12bXS12:8 3 X
+3V3
+3V3
+3V3
+12V
+5V
+5V
+5V
Power fail
Prot. earth
Power good
-12V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+PS1
+PS1
3V3SENSE
5VSENSE
3V3SENSEN
5VSENSEN
A5
P328352
P2
P1
X
X
BU3-EI-IDC
ST16-MINI-FIT-JR
X
ULTRASTAR 73LZX X X
Output 1:
Output 2:
3,3V (+/-5%) 4,5A
5V (+/-5%) 3A - 4A
X
X +PS1 Thermal head
Transport roller open detection X
PS/P3 P3 Output 3: +12V (+/-2%) 1,25A
Harddisk 1/12 1/12 Output 4: -12V (+/-2%) 0,15A eLabel pcb Address #4
A336045.0 2/12 2/12 Output 5: 24V (+/-5%) 4,0A
3/12 3/12
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Output 6: 13 .. 27V (+/-5mV) 300W
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Led on: Overtemperature protection mode.
4/12 4/12
5/12 5/12 CPU/Power supply control CPU/Display power
6/12 6/12
A345482. ASSY GEAR BOX (VAL)
Replace power supply instead.
Replace power supply instead.

7/12 7/12
Do not replace this fuse.1

8/12 8/12
Led on: Output 6 enabled
Do not replace this fuse.

A344554. TPH POWER CABLE
Overtemperature (red)
9/12 Mains 100V .. 240V

Led on: Output 1 OK.
10/12 50-60Hz
13..27V (green)
11/12 11/12 X
-12V (green)
3,3V (green)
12V (green)
24V (green)
+PS1
5V (green)
12/12 12/12 appliance_inlet

1 BU12-MICFITG 1/3
2/3 X X X X DATE NAME
2 x 15AF Drystar 5302
WIRING DIAGRAM DS5302 Section 4,Project
Part 2
3/3 General Circuit Diagram
X X X X USER 27/11/2003 L.Tibos
X
X
Type 5363/100
MAIN PAGE Diagram 1/7
5366
A344179. RIVETED FRAME (FRA) X
IEC 320/C14 X X X X APPR.
WIRING_DIAGRAM / 100
Power Supply (ELE)
X X X X X NORM Sheet name:
PS1
A333840. POWER SUPPLY (ELE) X X X X Sheet 2
F1006049.1
X
X X X L.Tibos of 8 SH
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O Agfa
IDX Company
Change-NR Confidential
DATE NAMEF 2005-09-09
Replacement for G X Edition 1, Revision 0
A B C D E F
A
X B
+A2 +M7 A Last
M7 M6-M7 Circuit
+ 1/2 RD
4 M 1 +XS4XS1-XS4:1 B 4
- 2/2 BK
2 +XS4XS1-XS4:2
BU2-MODU_II
ST2-MODU_II First Circuit2
X
+XS4 +XS4a
X RD
XS1-XS4 XS4 BK
+A2 +S16/S17 +M7M6-M7:1 1 1 DEV/P40:12
S16/S17 S14/S15-S16/S17 BK
+M7M6-M7:2 2 2 DEV/P40:11
RD
1/4 BK BK BK
1 +XS4XS1-XS4:3 +S16/S17S14/S15-S16/S17:1 3 3 DEV/P41:26
2/4 RD RD RD
3/4 VT VT VT
4/4 BU BU VT
X BU4-MODU_II
4
ST4-MODU_II
+XS4XS1-XS4:6 A344549. PICKUP CABLE OG
+S16/S17S14/S15-S16/S17:4 6 6 DEV/P41:25
OG, OG, OG
+Lower_PUIFE:1 7 7 DEV/P20:31,IFE#4:1,IFE#5:1
X RD RD, RD, RD /WIRING_DIAGRAM.4P
X +Lower_PUIFE:2 8 8 DEV/P20:34,IFE#4:2,IFE#5:2 X
BK BK, BK, BK
A2 +Lower_PUIFE:3 9 9 DEV/P20:32,IFE#4:3,IFE#5:3
A334505. FILM PICK-UP ASSY WH WH, WH, WH
+Lower_PUIFE:4 10 10 DEV/P20:33,IFE#4:4,IFE#5:4
WH RD
+S19S18-S19:1 11 11 DEV/P20:9
GN VT
+S19S18-S19:3 12 12 DEV/P20:11
BK, BN BK
+XS4XS1-XS4:14,+S19S18-S19:2 13 13 DEV/P20:10
Pickup Assembly BK
+XS4XS1-XS4:13 14 14 DEV/P20:26
VT
BU14-MINI-FIT ST14-MINI-FIT
3 3
X Drawer Connector
X +Lower_PU
IFE OG
1/4 1 +XS4XS1-XS4:7
2/4 RD
2 +XS4XS1-XS4:8
3/4 BK
3 +XS4XS1-XS4:9
X 4/4 WH
4 +XS4XS1-XS4:10
X ST4-MO53261-SMD
X BU4-51021
A3
A339838.
BL9
eLabel pcb Address #3
2 2
X
X
EE-SX4009-P1 X
+S19
Sensor-S19 S18-S19
1 WH
1 +XS4XS1-XS4:11
2 BN
2 +XS4XS1-XS4:13
3 GN
3 +XS4XS1-XS4:12
BU3-EI
Lower Pickup passed detection
1
X
General X X
Circuit Diagram X DATE Drystar
NAME 5302 Section 4, Project
Part 2
WIRING DIAGRAM DS5302
X X X X USER 27/11/2003TypeX 5363/100 Diagram 2/7
LOWER PICKUP ASM 5366
A343429. ASSY LOWER PICK-UP
X X X X APPR.
X X X X NORM Sheet name: Lower_pickup / 100
X X X X Printed copies of this document are not controlled. Sheet 3
X X X X F1006049.1
of 8 SH
A B C AgfaIDX Company
Change-NR
Confidential
DATE NAME 2005-09-09
Replacement for X Edition 1, Revision 0
A B C D E F
X
X
EE-SX4009-P1 X
+S2
Sensor-S2 S1-S2
4 1 RD 4
1 +XS9XS7-XS9:1
2 BK
2 +XS9XS7-XS9:3
3 VT
3 +XS9XS7-XS9:2
BU3-EI
X X
X X Lower magazine empty detection +XS9 +XS9a
+RF1 +RF1 RD
XS7-XS9 XS9 RD
ST1 RF/ST1 +S2S1-S2:1 1 1 DEV/P21:37 VOS
1/5 BK VT VT DIG_SENSOR26
1 +XS9XS7-XS9:4 +S2S1-S2:3 2 2 DEV/P21:36 /WIRING_DIAGRAM.9O
2/5 RD BK BK CURR_DIG_SENSOR26
2 +XS9XS7-XS9:5 +S2S1-S2:2 3 3 DEV/P21:35
X 3/5 WH BK BK GND
3 +XS9XS7-XS9:6 +RF1RF/ST1:1 4 4 DEV/P21:3
+RF1 4/5 YE RD RD +5V
X 5/5 BU WH WH RFID_TXD_RS
A6 5 +XS9XS7-XS9:8 +RF1RF/ST1:3 6 6 DEV/P21:4
ST5-MO53261-SMD YE YE RFID_RXD_RS
A335868. BU5-51021 +RF1RF/ST1:4 7 7 DEV/P21:6
BL6 BU BU RFID_RST_RS
+RF1RF/ST1:5 8 8 DEV/P21:8
X X
X 9 9 X
A344547. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (TRAY) X
X 10 10 X
X
RFID-TAG READER (PU) BK
BK
+XS9XS7-XS9:12 11 11 DEV/P21:33
BK
VT
GND
XX3
+XS9XS7-XS9:11 12 12 DEV/P21:34
3 BU12-70066 BU12-70066 3
A344550.
WIRE HARNESS ASSY (CASS ASM)
Connection between assemblies:
Mlx 70066 Receptacle Housing

Mates with Mlx 73099 Drawer connector.
2 2
1
Drystar
NAME 5302 Section 4, Part
Project2
X X X X DATE
General Circuit Diagram WIRING DIAGRAM DS5302
X X X X USER 27/11/2003Type X5363/100 Diagram 3/7
LOWER TRAY ASM 5366
A347152. LOWER TRAY ASM X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
APPR.
NORM Sheet name: Lower_tray / 100
X X X X Printed copies of this document are not controlled. Sheet 4
X X X X F1006049.1
of 8 SH
A B C AgfaIDXCompany
Change-NR
Confidential
A B C D E F G H
+output
OS-5101-H X
X
S5 S5
3 RD
3 +XS2bXS2:3
2 VT
2 +XS2bXS2:2
1 BK
1 +XS2bXS2:1
BU3-EI
6 6
+output
Output sensor TPH EE-SX4009-P1
X
S6 S6
1 RD
1 +XS2bXS2:4
2 BK
2 +XS2bXS2:5
3 VT
3 +XS2bXS2:6
BU3-EI
Output rollers home position +output

+output Cabled motor 18VDC
Cabled motor 18VDC M5
M4 X +XS2b +XS2a
X M5 XS2 XS2
M RD 1 1
M4
+XS2bXS2:7
RD M RD
BU
1
2
1
2
+XS2bXS2:9
+XS2bXS2:10
RD
BN
BK
VT
S5:1
S5:2
1
2
1
2
DEV/P1:23
DEV/P1:22
BK
VT
BU 2 BN RD RD
2 +XS2bXS2:8 ST2-EI S5:3 3 3 DEV/P1:24
RD RD
5 ST2-EI S6:1 4 4 DEV/P1:21 5
BK BK
S6:2 5 5 DEV/P1:20
VT VT
S6:3 6 6 DEV/P1:19
RD RD
Densitometer motor BN
M4:1 7 7 DEV/P1:11
BN
Exit roller motor A339841. X RD
M4:2 8 8 DEV/P1:12
RD
+output +output M5:1 9 9 DEV/P1:9
ST1 BN BN
IFE OG OG
M5:2 10 10 DEV/P1:10
OG
1/4 1 +XS2bXS2:11 +outputIFE:1 11 11 DEV/P1:2
2/4 RD RD RD
2 +XS2bXS2:12 +outputIFE:2 12 12 DEV/P1:3
3/4 BK BK BK
X 4/4 WH WH WH
+output ST4-MO53261-SMD
X BU4-51021
A4
X
A344552. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (OUTPUT ASM)
BK VT
+XS2bXS2:19 18 18 +XS3aXS3:21
BK VT
+XS2bXS2:18 19 19 DEV/P1:39
BU19-70066 ST19-70107
4 4
X
/WIRING_DIAGRAM.2P
A344551. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (OUTPUT)
X
+CDM +output +XS3b +XS3a
P1 P1 XS3 XS3
1/14 YE YE YE
1 +XS3bXS3:1 +outputP1:1 1 1 DEV/P9:1
2/14 BK BK BK
3/14 WH WH WH
4/14 BU BU BU
5/14 VT VT VT
6/14 BU BU BU
7/14 VT VT VT
8/14 BU BU BU
3 8 +XS3bXS3:8 +outputP1:8 8 8 DEV/P9:12 3
9/14 VT VT VT
10/14 BK BK BK
11/14 OG OG OG
12/14 WH WH WH
13/14 RD RD RD
14/14 BK BK BK
ST14-MO53261-SMD
14
BU14-51021
+XS3bXS3:14
RD
VT
+outputP1:14
S10:1
14
15
14
15
DEV/P9:16
DEV/P1:30
RD
VT
Connection adjustment
S10:3 16 16 DEV/P1:28 .1
X
+CDM
P2
+output
P2
A344553. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (OUTPUT ASM) BK
BK
S10:4
S25:1
17
18
17
18
DEV/P1:29
DEV/P1:18
BK
BK
on XS3 pin pos. 15 .. 17
1/4 YE VT VT
1 +outputLED/P1:1
X
cdm pcb 2/4 2 +outputLED/P1:2
BU RD
S25:2 19 19 DEV/P1:17
RD
3/4 BK +output asm S25:3 20 20 DEV/P1:16
X 3 +outputLED/P1:3 X BK VT
4/4 WH EE-SX670 +XS3bXS3:22 21 21 +XS2aXS2:18
X 4 +outputLED/P1:4 X BK BK
CDM ST4-MO53261-SMD Sensor-S10 S10 +XS3bXS3:21 22 22 DEV/P1:40
X BU4-51021 1 RD BU22-70066 ST22-70107
1 +XS3bXS3:15
2
L
3 VT
3 +XS3bXS3:16
4 BK
4 +XS3bXS3:17
BU4-EE-1001
2 X X
+CDM-LED +output
P1 LED/P1
1/4 1 +outputP2:1
YE Densitometer home position
2/4 BU
2 +outputP2:2
3/4 BK
3 +outputP2:3
4/4 WH
4 +outputP2:4
ST4-MO53261-SMD
BU4-51021 +output asm
OS-5101-H X
X
Xcdm-led pcb
Sensor-S25 S25
3 RD
X 3 +XS3bXS3:20
2 VT
X 2 +XS3bXS3:19
CDM-LED 1 BK
1 +XS3bXS3:18
X
BL15 BU3-EI
Output sensor
General Circuit Diagram Drystar 5302 Section 4, Part 2
1 Type 5363/100 Diagram 4/7
X X X X DATE NAME
WIRING DIAGRAM DS5302 Project
X X X X USER 28/11/2003 L.Tibos
OUTPUT ASM 5366
A343179. OUTPUT ASM
X X X X APPR.
Printed
X copies
X of this
X document
X are not controlled.
NORM Sheet name: Output_asm / 100
The reader should always refer toX MedNet
X to ensure
X that they
X are working with the latest copy of the document. Sheet 5
Agfa Company ConfidentialF

X X X
2005-09-09
X F1006049.1 of 8 SH
A B C D E IDX Change-NR DATE NAME Replacement for X Edition 1, Revision 0
A B C D E F
3 1
4 4
X
X
S26
X X
+XS11a +XS11b
Vacuum Switch BN
XS11 XS11 BN
S26:1 1 1 DEV/P41:3
BK BK /WIRING_DIAGRAM.5P
S26:3 2 2 DEV/P41:4 X
X
X
M9
rd
3 M bk 3
Vacuum pump
X X
+XS10a +XS10b
RD
XS10 XS10 BU
M9:rd 1 1 DEV/P40:9
BK BN
M9:bk 2 2 DEV/P40:10
BK WH
V1:1 3 3 DEV/P40:7
BK BN /WIRING_DIAGRAM.4P
V1:2 4 4 DEV/P40:8 X
BK GY
V2:1 5 5 DEV/P40:5
X BK BN
V2:2 6 6 DEV/P40:6
X
X
A337916. PUMP & VALVES ASSY CABLE
V1
Upper magazine vacuum valve

2 2
X
X
X
V2
Lower magazine vacuum valve
1
X X
General Circuit Diagram
X X DATE Drystar
NAME 5302
WIRING DIAGRAM DS5302 Section 4, Project
Part 2
X X X X USER 28/11/2003TypeX 5363/100 Diagram 5/7
X X X X APPR.
PUMP & VALVES ASM 5366
A329746. PUMP & VALVES ASM X

X
X
X X
X
X
X NORM
Sheet name: Pump_&_Valves_asm / 100
Sheet 6
X X X X F1006049.1
of 8 SH
A B C Agfa
IDX Company
A B C D E F
A
X B
X A
X +M6 Last
Circuit
BU-M6 M6-M7
+ 1/2 RD B
M 1 +XS1XS1-XS4:1
4 - 2/2 BK 4
2 +XS1XS1-XS4:2
BU2-MODU_II First Circuit2
ST2-MODU_II
X X
+XS1 +XS1a
X X RD
XS1-XS4 XS1 BK
X +S14/S15 +M6M6-M7:1 1 1 DEV/P40:14
BU-S14/S15 BK RD
S14/S15-S16/S17 BK BK
+M6M6-M7:2 2 2 DEV/P40:13
BK
1/4 1 +XS1XS1-XS4:3 +S14/S15S14/S15-S16/S17:1 3 3 DEV/P41:29
2/4 RD RD RD
3/4 VT VT VT
4/4 VT VT VT
X BU4-MODU_II
4
ST4-MODU_II
+XS1XS1-XS4:6 A334549. PICKUP CABLE OG
+S14/S15S14/S15-S16/S17:4
+Upper_PUIFE:1
6
7
6
7
DEV/P20:29
DEV/P40:32
OG
X
X RD RD /WIRING_DIAGRAM.3P
+Upper_PUIFE:2 8 8 DEV/P40:33
X BK BK
A1 +Upper_PUIFE:3 9 9 DEV/P40:31
WH WH
A334505. FILM PICK-UP ASSY +Upper_PUIFE:4 10 10 DEV/P40:34
BL1 WH RD
+S18S18-S19:1 11 11 DEV/P20:37
GN VT
+S18S18-S19:3 12 12 DEV/P20:35
BK, BN BK
+XS1XS1-XS4:14,+S18S18-S19:2 13 13 DEV/P20:36
Pickup Assembly BK
+XS1XS1-XS4:13 14 14 DEV/P40:25
VT
BU14-MINI-FIT ST14-MINI-FIT
3 3
X X Drawer Connector
+upper pick-up +Upper_PU
ST1 IFE
1/4 OG
1 +XS1XS1-XS4:7
2/4 RD
2 +XS1XS1-XS4:8
3/4 BK
3 +XS1XS1-XS4:9
X 4/4 WH
4 +XS1XS1-XS4:10
+upper pick-up ST4-MO53261-SMD
X BU4-51021
A2
A339838.
BL2
2 2
X
X
EE-SX4009-P1 X
+S18
Sensor-S18 S18-S19
1 WH
1 +XS1XS1-XS4:11
2 BN
2 +XS1XS1-XS4:13
3 GN
3 +XS1XS1-XS4:12
BU3-EI
Upper Pickup passed detection
1
X
General X X
Circuit Diagram X DATE Drystar
NAME 5302
WIRING DIAGRAM DS5302 Section 4, Part
Project2
X X X X USER 18/11/2003Type X5363/100 Diagram 6/7
X X X X APPR.
UPPER PICKUP ASM 5366
A342999. ASSY Upper Pick-up X

X
X
X X
X
X
X NORM
Sheet name: Upper_pickup / 100
Sheet 7
B
X X X X F1006049.1
of 8 SH
A B C D E F
X
X
EE-SX4009-P1 X
+S1
Sensor-S1 S1-S2
1 RD
1 +XS7XS7-XS9:1
2 BK
2 +XS7XS7-XS9:3
3 VT
3 +XS7XS7-XS9:2
BU3-EI
Upper magazine empty detection X

+XS7
X
+XS7a
XS7-XS9 XS7
4 A335868. X X
RD
VT
+S1S1-S2:1 1 1 DEV/P21:40
RD
VT
VOS
/WIRING_DIAGRAM.9O
4
DIG_SENSOR27
+RF2 +RF2 +S1S1-S2:3 2 2 DEV/P21:39
ST1 BK BK CURR_DIG_SENSOR27
RF/ST1 BK BK
+S1S1-S2:2 3 3 DEV/P21:38
BK
1/5 1 +XS7XS7-XS9:4 +RF2RF/ST1:1 4 4 DEV/P21:9 GND
/WIRING_DIAGRAM.8O
2/5 RD RD RD +5V (filtered)
X 3/5 WH WH WH RFIDB_TXD_RS
+RF2 4/5 YE YE YE RFIDB_RXD_RS
X 5/5 BU BU BU RFIDB_RST_RS
A3 5 +XS7XS7-XS9:8 +RF2RF/ST1:5 8 8 DEV/P21:14
ST5-MO53261-SMD X X
X BU5-51021 X 9 9 X
BL3 A344547. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (TRAY) X
X 10 10 X
X
BK BK GND
+XS7XS7-XS9:12 11 11 DEV/P21:15
BK VT, VT
+XS7XS7-XS9:11 12 12 DEV/P21:9,+XS8aXS8:9
RFID-TAG READER (PU) BU12-70066 BU12-70066
3 3
Connection between assemblies:
Mlx 70066 Receptacle Housing

Mates with Mlx 73099 Drawer connector.
X X
+XS8b +XS8a
X XS8 XS8
X BK BK CURR_DIG_SENSOR15
S11:1 1 1 DEV/P21:30 /WIRING_DIAGRAM.9O
OS-5101-H X VT VT DIG_SENSOR15
X S11:2 2 2 DEV/P21:29
Sensor-S11 RD RD VOS
3
S11 RD BK
S11:3 3 3 DEV/P21:31
BK
/WIRING_DIAGRAM.9O
CURR_DIG_SENSOR25
3 +XS8bXS8:3 S24:1 4 4 DEV/P21:18 /WIRING_DIAGRAM.8O
2 VT VT VT DIG_SENSOR25
2 +XS8bXS8:2 S24:2 5 5 DEV/P21:17
1 BK RD RD VOS
1 +XS8bXS8:1 S24:3 6 6 DEV/P21:19
X X
BU3-EI X 7 7 X
A344548. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (TRAY DET) X
X 8 8 X
X
BK VT
+XS8bXS8:10 9 9 +XS7aXS7:12
2 BK VT XX1 2
+XS8bXS8:9 10 10 DEV/P21:16
Take over passed detection BU10-70066 BU10-70066
A344550.
WIRE HARNESS ASSY (CASS ASM)
X
X
OS-5101-H X
X
Sensor-S24 S24
3 RD
3 +XS8bXS8:6
2 VT
2 +XS8bXS8:5
1 BK
1 +XS8bXS8:4
BU3-EI
Take over passed detection

1
X X
General Circuit Diagram
X X DATE Drystar
NAME5302
WIRING DIAGRAM DS5302 Section 4, Part
Project2
X X X X USER Type X5363/100
18/11/2003 Diagram 7/7
X X X X APPR.
UPPER TRAY ASM 5366
A347151. UPPER TRAY ASM X

X
X
X X
X
X
X NORM

Sheet name: Upper_tray / 100
Sheet 8
X X X X F1006049.1
of 8 SH
Spare Parts List
Document No: DD+DIS050.05M
Drystar 5302
Type 5366/0100
5366_chap05_title_m.CDR
Internal update: 3
Edition 1, Revision 1 Document Node ID: 16880214

03-2008 printed in Germany spare_parts_e_template_v07
DD+DIS050.05M Spare Parts List
Manufacturer
Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:

INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper

operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the GSO library.


Document History
Edition, Release Changes compared to previous version 1.0
Revision Date
1.1 03-2008 Spare Parts List completely revised
RoHS compliant Spare Parts added and marked
Contact
Spare Parts ordering
Europe orderprocessing-europe.matrium@eads.com
Overseas orderprocessing-overseas.matrium@eads.com
Spare Parts returns
Worldwide returns.matrium@eads.com
NOTE:
For Recycling Information please refer to:
http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf


Contents
VERKLEIDUNG
COVERS LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
REVETEMET POWER UNIT
PAGES 6 - 7 MODULE DE PUISSANCE
PAGES 14 - 15
ANTRIEB LINKS
DRIVE LEFT
ENTRAINEMENT Á GAUCHE
PAGES 10 - 11
ANTRIEB
DRIVE
ENTRAINEMENT
PAGES 8 - 9
ANTRIEB / LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
DRIVE / POWER UNIT
ENTRAINEMENT / MODULE DE PUISSANCE
Drystar 5302 printers with SN>10.000 are RoHS compliant. PAGES 12 - 13
For those printers only use RoHS compliant Spare Parts.
For Drystar 5302 printers with SN<10.000

Non-RoHs conformed Spare Parts can be used till end of stock
as well as RoHS compliant Spare Parts. 5366_chap05_index_m.CDR


How to navigate the spare parts list online with the

Acrobat Reader
(1) Open Bookmarks
(2) Click on "CONTENTS"
(3) See overview of the modules

(4) Click on requested module
(5) Appropriate page opens
(6) Click on green arrow to

navigate back to the overview
of the modules


04*
06*
05* 04*
05*
03
(MOD 01)
01 07*
05*
(MOD 10)
02
(MOD 02)
Drystar 5302 printers with SN>10.000 are RoHS compliant.


as well as RoHS compliant Spare Parts. 5366_chap05_01_m.CDR
COVERS


03-2008 Agfa Company Confidential
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung
Item no. Part No. Description
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination
1 CM+3433741 TASTATUR / ANZEIGEMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 10)
KEYPAD / DISPLAY MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 10)
CLAVIER / MODULE AFFICHEUR (ROHS) (MOD 10)
1 CM+3433363 TASTATUR / ANZEIGEMODUL (MOD 10) - BIS FN9.999
KEYPAD / DISPLAY MODULE (MOD 10) - UP TO SN9.999
CLAVIER / MODULE AFFICHEUR (MOD 10) - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
2 CM+3492662 UNTERE ABLAGE W/O TAG (ROHS) (MOD 02)
LOWER TRAY W/O TAG (ROHS) (MOD 02)
RÉCEPTACLE EN TÔLE EN BAS W/O TAG (ROHS) (MOD 02)
3 CM+3492671 OBERE ABLAGE W/O TAG (MOD 01) - BIS FN9.999
UPPER TRAY W/O TAG (MOD 01) - UP TO SN9.999
RÉCEPTACLE EN TÔLE EN HAUT W/O TAG (MOD 01) - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
3 CM+3492672 OBERE ABLAGE W/O TAG (ROHS) (MOD 01)
UPPER TRAY W/O TAG (ROHS) (MOD 01)
RÉCEPTACLE EN TÔLE EN HAUT W/O TAG (ROHS) (MOD 01)
4 CM+3492812 * OBERE & HINTERE OBERE ABDECKUNG (ROHS)
TOP COVER & REAR TOP COVER ASSY (ROHS)
COUVERCLE EN HAUT (ROHS)
5 CM+3492822 * LINKE, RECHTE & VORDERE ABDECKUNG (ROHS)
LEFT, RIGHT & FRONT COVER (ROHS)
COUVERCLE AVANT, GAUCHE & DROIT (ROHS)
6 CM+3492831 * FILMAUSGABE (ROHS)
OUTPUT TRAY (ROHS)
RECEPTACLE FILM (ROHS)
7 CM+3492840 * HANDGRIFFE - BIS FN9.999
HAND GRIPS - UP TO SN9.999
POIGNÉE - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
7 CM+3492841 * HANDGRIFFE (ROHS)
HAND GRIPS (ROHS)
POIGNÉE (ROHS)
=Assembly
D =Standard part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standard parts "DD+DIS011.93M"
* =No wearing part.
COVERS


03
(MOD 16)
04
01
(MOD 06)
08
09
(MOD 11)
02
(MOD 03)
02
(MOD 04) 06
(MOD 13)
05
Drystar 5302 printers with SN>10.000 are RoHS compliant. (MOD 14)
For those printers only use RoHS compliant Spare Parts. 07
DRIVE


1 CM+3492723 AUSGABEMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 06)
OUTPUT MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 06)
MODULE DE SORTIE (ROHS) (MOD 06)
2 CM+3492685 AUFNAHMEMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 03,04)
PICK UP MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 03,04)
MODULE DE RECEPTION (ROHS) (MOD 03,04)
3 CM+3492731 TPH KÜHLGEBLÄSE (MOD 16) - BIS FN9.999
TPH COOLING FAN (MOD 16) - UP TO SN9.999
VENTILATEUR THP (MOD 16) - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
3 CM+3492732 TPH KÜHLGEBLÄSE (ROHS) (MOD 16)
TPH COOLING FAN (ROHS) (MOD 16)
VENTILATEUR THP (ROHS) (MOD 16)
4 CM+3433501 MODUL 'TPH FILTER' (ROHS)
TPH FILTER MODULE (ROHS)
MODULE FILTRE TPH (ROHS)
5 CM+3492693 GETRIEBE & RIEMEN (MOD 14) - BIS FN9.999
GEAR BOX & BELT (MOD 14) - UP TO SN9.999
ENGRENAGE & COURROIE (MOD 14) - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
5 CM+3492694 GETRIEBE & RIEMEN (ROHS) (MOD 14)
GEAR BOX & BELT (ROHS) (MOD 14)
ENGRENAGE & COURROIE (ROHS) (MOD 14)
6 CM+3492761 NOCKENWELLENANTRIEBSMODUL (MOD 13) - BIS FN9.999
CAM DRIVE MODUL (MOD 13) - UP TO SN9.999
MODULE D'ENTRAINENMENT (MOD 13) - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
6 CM+3492762 NOCKENWELLENANTRIEBSMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 13)
CAM DRIVE MODUL (ROHS) (MOD 13)
MODULE D'ENTRAINENMENT (ROHS) (MOD 13)
7 CM+3492872 TPH FLACHKABEL (ROHS)
TPH FLAT CABLE (ROHS)
CABLE PLAT TPH (ROHS)
8 CM+3097371 FILMSENSOR (ROHS) - (S5)
FILM SENSOR (ROHS) - (S5)
DETECTEUR FILM (ROHS) - (S5)
9 CM+3492801 EINGABESENSORMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 11)
INPUT SENSOR MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 11)
MODULE CAPTEURS D'ENTREE (ROHS) (MOD 11)
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
DRIVE


03
07 04
05
(MOD 15)
01
(MOD 17)
02
(MOD 07) 06

as well as RoHS compliant Spare Parts.
5366_chap05_03_m.CDR
DRIVE LEFT


1 CM+3392172 PUMPEN- UND VENTILBAUGRUPPE (ROHS) (MOD 17)
PUMP & VALVES ASSY (ROHS) (MOD 17)
ENSEMBLE POMPES ET VALVES (ROHS) (MOD 17)
2 CM+3492701 WALZENANTRIEBSMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 07)
DRUM DRIVE MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 07)
MODULE D'ENTRAINEMENT DU CYLINDRE (ROHS) (MOD 07)
3 CM+3492710 DRUCKTROMMEL - BIS FN9.999
PRINT DRUM MODULE - UP TO SN9.999
TAMBOUR D'IMPRESSION - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
3 CM+3492711 DRUCKTROMMEL (ROHS)
PRINT DRUM MODULE (ROHS)
TAMBOUR D'IMPRESSION (ROHS)
4 CM+3433521 HAUPTANTRIEBSRAD & WALZENANTRIEBSRIEMEN (ROHS)
MAIN DRIVE PULLEY & DRUM BELT (ROHS)
ROUE D'ENTRAINEMENT &COURROIES D'ENTRAINEMENT DU TAMBOUR (ROHS)
4 CM+3433520 HAUPTANTRIEBSRAD & WALZENANTRIEBSRIEMEN - BIS FN9.999
MAIN DRIVE PULLEY & DRUM BELT - UP TO SN9.999
ROUE D'ENTRAINEMENT &COURROIES D'ENTRAINEMENT DU TAMBOUR - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
5 CM+3492741 ANTRIEBSMODUL (MOD 15) - BIS FN9.999
SUSPENSION DRIVE MODULE (MOD 15) - UP TO SN9.999
MODULE D'ENTRAÎNEMENT (MOD 15) - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
5 CM+3492742 ANTRIEBSMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 15)
SUSPENSION DRIVE MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 15)
MODULE D'ENTRAÎNEMENT (ROHS) (MOD 15)
6 CM+3433750 OSB PCB (ROHS)
OSB PCB (ROHS)
OSB PCB (ROHS)
7 CM+3097911 LICHTSCHRANKE (ROHS)
LIGHT BARRIER (ROHS)
PHOTO CELLULE (ROHS)
7 CM+3097910 LICHTSCHRANKE - BIS FN9.999
LIGHT BARRIER - UP TO SN9.999
PHOTO CELLULE - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
DRIVE LEFT


02
(MOD 05)
03
04 (MOD 08)
05
09
08
(MOD 20)
01 06 (MOD 12) 07
10 (MOD 18)


as well as RoHS compliant Spare Parts.
5366_chap05_04_m.CDR
DRIVE / POWER UNIT


1 CM+3392675 RF TAG READER (ROHS)
RF TAG READER ASSY (ROHS)
DISPOSITIF DE LECTURE DES ETIQUETTES (ROHS)
2 CM+3492643 THERMODRUCKKOPF DS530X (MOD 05)
THERMAL HEAD DS530X (MOD 05)
TETE THERMIQUE DS530X (MOD 05)
3 CM+3492773 NOCKENWELLENANTRIEB (ROHS)
CAM DRIVE SHAFT (ROHS)
ENTRAINEMENT A CAME (ROHS)
3 CM+3492772 NOCKENWELLENANTRIEB - BIS FN9.999
CAM DRIVE SHAFT - UP TO SN9.999
ENTRAINEMENT A CAME - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
4 CM+3492750 DEVIL / THEMIS / RAM MODULE (MOD 08) - BIS FN9.999
DEVIL / THEMIS / RAM MODULE (MOD 08) - UP TO SN9.999
DEVIL / THEMIS / RAM MODULE (MOD 08) - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
4 CM+3492892 DEVIL / THEMIS / RAM MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 08) - SW 1.9.X BENÖTIGT
DEVIL / THEMIS / RAM MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 08) - SW 1.9.X REQUIRED
DEVIL / THEMIS / RAM MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 08) - AVOIR BESOIN DE SW 1.9.X
5 CM+3492862 LEITERPLATTE (ROHS) - SW 1.9.X BENÖTIGT
DEVIL (ROHS) - SW 1.9.X REQUIRED
CARTE À CIRCUITS IMPRIMÉ (ROHS) - AVOIR BESOIN DE SW 1.9.X
5 CM+3492790 LEITERPLATTE
DEVIL PCB
CARTE À CIRCUITS IMPRIMÉ
6 CM+3433693 THEMIS 7 W/O RAM (ROHS) (MOD 12) - SW 1.9.X BENÖTIGT
THEMIS 7 W/O RAM (ROHS) (MOD 12) - SW 1.9.X REQUIRED
THEMIS 7 W/O RAM (ROHS) (MOD 12) - AVOIR BESOIN DE SW 1.9.X
6 CM+3433652 THEMIS4B W/O SDRAM (MOD 12) - BIS FN9.999
THEMIS4B W/O SDRAM (MOD 12) - UP TO SN9.999
THEMIS4B W/O SDRAM (MOD 12) - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
7 CM+3433703 512MB RAM MODUL (ROHS) (MOD 18) - SW 1.9.X BENÖTIGT
512MB RAM MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 18) - SW 1.9.X REQUIRED
MODULE 512MB RAM (ROHS) (MOD 18) - AVOIR BESOIN DE SW 1.9.X
7 CM+3433630 512MB SDRAM MODUL (MOD 18) - BIS FN9.999
512MB SDRAM MODULE (MOD 18) - UP TO SN9.999
MODULE 512MB SDRAM (MOD 18) - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
8 CM+3433401 VILIS KÜHLGEBLÄSE (ROHS) (MOD 20)
VILIS COOLING FAN (ROHS) (MOD 20)
VENTILATEUR VILIS (ROHS) (MOD 20)
9 CM+3433562 COMPACT FLASH KARTE 1BG (ROHS)
COMPACT FLASH CARD 1BG (ROHS)
CARTE COMPACT FLASH 1BG (ROHS)
10 CM+3460393 KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS)
KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS)
KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS)
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
DRIVE / POWER UNIT


01
(MOD 09)
02
03
04
Name Quantity Purpose

Female vacuum connector 2 Vacuum connector inside printer.
Counterpart to male vacuum connector at pickup module.
Shaft holder left Shaft holder right Guide Latch Male vacuum connector 2 Vacuum connector at pickup module
(Vertical Alignment) (Vertical Alignment) (Vertical Alignment)
Guide latch 2 Vertical alignment guide latch (left and right hand side)
(Vertical Alignment)
Gear box spring 1 Tension spring for gear box belt
Gear box belt 1 Belt for gear box
Male Female
vacuum vacuum
Gear Box Spring connector connector Gear Box Belt


POWER UNIT


1 CM+3492781 NETZTEIL - ROHS (MOD 09)
POWER SUPPLY - ROHS (MOD 09)
ALIMENTATION - ROHS (MOD 09)
2 CM+3260512 FESTPLATTE 73GB - BIS FN9.999
HARDDISK 73GB - UP TO SN9.999
DISQUE DUR 73GB - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
2 CM+3260513 FESTPLATTE 73GB (ROHS)
HARDDISK 73GB (ROHS)
DISQUE DUR 73GB (ROHS)
3 CM+3392031 HDD-KABEL (ROHS)
HDD CABLE (ROHS)
CABLE HDD (ROHS)
4 CM+3492881 EINZELTEIL KIT (ROHS)
SMALL COMPONENTS KIT (ROHS)
KIT PIÈCES DÉTACHÉES (ROHS)
4 CM+3492880 EINZELTEIL KIT - BIS FN9.999
SMALL COMPONENTS KIT - UP TO SN9.999
KIT PIÈCES DÉTACHÉES - JUSQU'AU NS9.999
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
POWER UNIT


Spare Parts Kit Categories
R 'Repair' Parts required to repair a machine

Kit `R` should be part of the field service engineers` car stock.
Quantity covers requirements for ca. 10 machines.
Adapt quantity locally depending on:
• number of machines
• extension of the service area
• local service structure (centralized / decentralized)
• stockpiling
I 'Installation' Parts required to install a machine

Kit `I`should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts to perform the installation (does not comprise parts
included in the shipment).
Quantity covers one single machine installation.
M 'Maintenance' Parts required to maintain a machine

Kit `M` should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts required to perform a maintenance according to the
maintenance checklist.
Quantity covers one single maintenance.
L 'Local stock' Extremely expensive or bulky parts

Kit `L` should be part of the local central warehouse.
Determine quantity depending on costs and on the installed base.
Spare Parts Kit Order numbers
Order number Spare Part Kit version

CM+053660100733 Drystar 5302 Sortiment M 3


Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s):
Device Name Type No. Specification

DRYSTAR 5302 5366/0100 100-240V AC / 50/60Hz
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:
Accessory Order number

MOBILE KIT EX2DV


Chapter 8
HEALTHCARE Manufacturing Standard
Imaging Services
Modifications
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
► Purpose of this Document

This document provides an overview of all product modifications which may be of
importance for Service. They are listed in chronological sequence.
Edition. Release Changes:

Revision Date
1.0 05-2008 Initial version
Document Title
n.a. n.a.

eq_08_modifications_e_template_v07
DD+DIS149.08E Manufacturing Standard Modifications
► Manufacturer
Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the GSO library.


OVERVIEW OF MODIFICATIONS:
Timeline Modification Referenced Documents
2008
April Introduction of “Upper Pickup Modification Kit” • SB No. 08
incl. Software 1.9.1_C1 DD+DIS400.07E
• Enclosure
DD+DIS399.07E
February Changed Compact Flash Card 128 MB to 1 GB None
2007
November Changed TPH Module CM+349264.2 None
November Changed Input Sensor Module CM+349280.1 None
August Software CR ROM 1.9.0_C4 as Successor of SB No. 07, DD+DIS263.07E
1.9.0_C2 for RoHS Spare Parts
August Changed RF Tag Reader CM+339267.3 None
July Changed Pickup Module CM+349268.3 None
July Introduction of Software 1.9.0_C4 SB No. 07, DD+DIS2634.07E
Enclosure DD+DIS268.07E
June Release of RoHS compliant Spare Parts SB No. 06, DD+DIS064.07E
June Release of RoHS compliant Printer / Introduction SB No. 06, DD+DIS064.07E
of Software 1.9.0_C2
March Changed TPH Module CM+349264.1 None
February Added Label at Printer Rear Side with None
Explanation of Network Activity LEDs
January Changed Display Module CM+343336.2 None
January Introduction of new Film Format Positioners in None
Upper Tray Module CM+349267.0 and Lower
Tray Module 349266.0


Timeline Modification Referenced Documents
2006
October Changed Gear Box Module (MOD14) SB No. 04 DD+DIS349.06E
CM+349269.2 in combination with DRYSTAR
5302 software patch 1.8.1_C1
August Intruduction of RoHS compliant Power Supply None
Module
July Introduction of Heat Sink Replacement Kit as • Enclosure
Spare Part DD+DIS194.06E
• Troubleshooting Guide
DD+DIS211.07E
May Changed Gear Box Module (MOD14) None
CM+349269.1
May Changed TPH Cooling Fan CM+349273.0 None
April Removed “Output Sensor Sensor S25” in Output None
Module
March Changed Display Module CM+343336.1 None
February Changed Pickup Module CM+349268.1 None
January Changed Output Module CM+349272.1 Troubleshooting Guide
DD+DIS211.07E
2005
November Introduction of Software Release 1.8.0_C2 SB No. 03, DD+DIS403.05E


1 Introduction of Software Release 1.8.0_C2
Reason Support of additional languages for the Operator and Key-Operator

menu.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1156 (incl. SN 1143 and SN 1149) / Nov. 2005

Serial
Number(s)
Part Software only available via MEDNET, GSO library
Number(s)
Referenced SB No. 03, DD+DIS403.05E
Document(s)
2 Changed Output Module CM+349272.1
Reason Improvement of Film Run in Output Module
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1336 / January 2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part Output Module CM+349272.2
Number(s)
Referenced Troubleshooting Guide DD+DIS211.07E
Document(s)


3 Changed Pickup Module CM+349268.1
Reason • Improved 174 mm banding line (not visible in clinical images,

only visible in technical flatfield image).
• Improved production process.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1398 / February 2006
Serial
Number(s)
Part Pickup Module CM+349268.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
4 Changed Display Module CM+343336.1
Reason Improved connector to prevent that cable to display board can be

removed accidentally at mounting of right cover.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1468 / March 2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part Display module CM+343336.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


5 Removed “Output Sensor Sensor S25” in Output Module
Reason Output sensor is removed as is not used by software for film jam
detection
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1522 / April 2006
Serial
Number(s)
Part None
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
6 Changed TPH Cooling Fan CM+349273.0
Reason Improvement of production process: Some fans generated

disturbing noise in production.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1578 / May 2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part TPH cooling fan CM+349273.1
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


7 Changed Gear Box Module (MOD14) CM+349269.1
Reason Improvement of production process
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1603 / May 2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part Gear box module CM+349269.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
8 Introduction of Heat Sink Replacement Kit as Spare Part
Reason To allow replacing heat sink at Themis CPU instead of replacing

the Themis CPU when the heat sink holder is broken.
Product(s) & Only introduced as spare part / July 2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part Heatsink Replacement Kit CM+346039.1
Number(s)
Referenced • Heatsink Kit Enclosure DD+DIS194.06E
Document(s)
• Troubleshooting Guide DD+DIS211.07E


9 Intruduction of RoHS compliant Power Supply Module
Reason Preparation of the printer for RoHS compliance.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1863 plus 1847, 1853, 1856, 1848, 1854, 1858, 1850, 1855 /
Serial August 2006
Number(s)
Part Power Supply Module (RoHS) CM+349278.1
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
10 Changed Gear Box Module (MOD14) CM+349269.2 in

combination with DRYSTAR 5302 software patch 1.8.1_C1
Reason Improvement of film run
Product(s) & SN ≥ 2175 / October 2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part Gear box module CM+349269.3
Number(s)
Referenced SB No. 04 DD+DIS349.06E
Document(s)


11 Introduction of new Film Format Positioners in Upper Tray

Module CM+349267.0 and Lower Tray Module 349266.0
Reason Reduce tolerances of film in input tray: improve film positioning.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 2810 plus 2723, 2725, 2789, 2793, 2804, 2805, 2727, 2753,
Serial 2797, 2798, 2808, 2778, 2788, 2799, 2802 / January 2007
Number(s)
Part • Lower Tray CM+349266.1
Number(s)
• Upper Tray CM+349267.1
Referenced None
Document(s)
12 Changed Display Module CM+343336.2
Reason Improved production process to prevent pixel failures on LCD

displays in production.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 2808 plus 2726, 2727, 2793, 2794, 2800, 2801, 2806, 2788,
Serial 2789, 2795, 2796, 2802, 2803, 2790, 2792, 2797, 2799, 2804,
Number(s) 2805 / January 2007
Part Display Module CM+343336.3
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


13 Added Label at Printer Rear Side with Explanation of Network

Activity LEDs
Reason Allowing interpretation of network LEDs without service manual
Product(s) & SN ≥ 3001 / February 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part None
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
14 Changed TPH Module CM+349264.1
Reason Improvement of production process: Heater foil was partly

detached.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 3049 without 3051, 3084, 3121, 3162, 3053, 3085, 3123,
Serial 3165, 3059, 3089, 3124, 3167, 3064, 3093, 3135, 3168, 3178 /
Number(s) March 2007
Part TPH Module CM+349264.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


15 Release of RoHS compliant Printer / Introduction of Software

1.9.0_C2
Reason Make printer compliant to the RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous

Substances) Directive No 2002/95/EC of the European Union.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 3930, plus 3642, 3645, 3711, 3714, 3798, 3803, 3815, 3856,
Serial 3862, 3864, 3865, 3867 to 3880, 3883, 3887, 3895, 3903 to 3909,
Number(s) 3911 to 3913, 3915 to 3924, 3926 to 3928 / June 2007
Part None
Number(s)
Document(s)
16 Release of RoHS compliant Spare Parts
Reason Make spare parts compliant to the RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous

Substances) Directive No 2002/95/EC of the European Union.
Product(s) & June 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part • Devil (RoHS) CM+349286.0
Number(s) • Themis7 (RoHS) CM+343369.0
• Devil/Themis/RAM (RoHS) CM+349289.0
• 512 MB (RoHS) CM+343370.0
Document(s)


17 Introduction of Software 1.9.0_C4
Reason Improvement of production process: Sporadic film jams in the

output module and too large top border appeared.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 4368 plus 3923, 3924, 3976, 3988, 3995, 4000, 4006, 4007,
Serial 4009, 4012, 4013, 4015, 4018, 4020, 4024, 4025, 4027, 4030,
Number(s) 4031, 4033, 4034, 4035, 4039, 4041, 4042, 4043, 4045, 4046,
4048, 4051, 4053, 4054, 4056 to 4058, 4061 to 4067, 4070, 4071,
4073, 4075, 4076, 4079, 4082 to 4087, 4090, 4091, 4093 to 4095,
4097, 4098, 4100, 4101, 4103 to 4112, 4115, 4117, 4118 to 4124,
4130, 4135, 4136, 4159, 4161, 4164, 4169, 4172, 4183, 4186,
4187 to 4195, 4201, 4202, 4208, 4212, 4213, 4214, 4216, 4217,
4219 to 4226, 4228, 4230, 4231 to 4237, 4239 to 4249, 4251,
4252, 4254 to 4262, 4264, 4266, 4267 to 4316, 4318 to 4354,
4355, 4357, 4358 to 4365, 4366 / July 2007
Part None
Number(s)
Referenced • SB No. 07, DD+DIS263.07E
Document(s)
• Installation Instructions SW 1.9.0_C4, DD+DIS268.07E
18 Changed Pickup Module CM+349268.3
Reason Improvement of production process: Faults in pickup module due to

too high tolerances.
Product(s) & July 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part Pickup Module CM+349268.4
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


19 Software CR ROM 1.9.0_C4 as Successor of 1.9.0_C2 for RoHS

Spare Parts
Reason RoHS spare parts were released with enclosed software CD ROM
1.9.0_C2.
Software 1.9.0_C4 is the successor of software 1.9.0_C2.
Product(s) & August 2007
Serial
Number(s)
Part • Devil (RoHS) CM+349286.1
Number(s) • Themis7 (RoHS) CM+343369.2
• Devil/Themis/RAM (RoHS) CM+349289.1
• 512 MB (RoHS) CM+343370.2

Document(s)
20 Changed RF Tag Reader CM+339267.3
Reason Make tag reader compatible to be used in DRYSTAR 5503, too.
Product(s) & August 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part RF Tag Reader CM+339267.4
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


21 Changed Input Sensor Module CM+349280.1
Reason Improvement of production process
Product(s) & SN ≥ 5253 / November 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part Input Sensor Module CM+349280.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
22 Changed TPH Module CM+349264.2
Reason Improvement of production process: Improved ground connection

to reduce pixel drops
Product(s) & Serial number not registered / November 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part TPH Module CM+349264.3
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


23 Changed Compact Flash Card 128 MB to 1 GB
Reason Change of type of compact flash card for printer backup due to
purchasing reasons.
Product(s) & Printers and spare parts delivered as of February 2008

Serial
Number(s)
Part • Compact Flash 1 GB, CM+343356.2
Number(s)
Referenced • None
Document(s)
24 Introduction of “Upper Pickup Modification Kit”

incl. Software 1.9.1_C1
Reason Improvement of film run
Product(s) & • The “Upper Pickup Modification Kit” was introduced in

Serial production as of SN 5615.
Number(s)
• Software 1.9.1_C1 was introduced in production as of SN
5723 plus SNs 5660, 5665, 5667, 5669, 5672, 5676, 5677,
5679, 5683, 5684, 5717, 5719, 5721
• Introduction in April 2008
Part “Upper Pickup Modification Kit”, CM+361703.0
Number(s)
Referenced • SB No. 08 DD+DIS400.07E

Document(s)
• Upper Pickup Modification Kit” Enclosure DD+DIS399.07E


HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Order-No.: DD+DIS149.05E
*1YZO5L1*
1 Piece YZO5L MA1
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
The Maintenance document is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS149.05E


Maintenance DD+DIS149.05E
Caution:
This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must only be performed by qualified
technical personnel.
Note:
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.

Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
CE Declaration:
According to the medical guidelines, the CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the
product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer!
This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
We reserve the right to change data and characteristics in the light of technical
progress.

Chapter 9 DRYSTAR 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
DD+DIS149.05E Maintenance
Chapter 9:
List of contents
1 Safety .................................................................................... 1
2 Introduction .......................................................................... 3
2.1 Maintenance frequency ....................................................................... 3
2.2 Required time ....................................................................................... 3
2.3 Required tools ...................................................................................... 3
2.4 Required cleaning material ................................................................. 4
2.5 Required spare parts ........................................................................... 4
3 Diagnostics........................................................................... 5
3.1 Questioning of the customer .............................................................. 5
3.2 Infocounter analysis ............................................................................ 5
3.2.1 Infocounter Analysis via Printers Infocounters Report ...................................... 6
3.2.2 Infocounter analysis via Service Command session......................................... 7
3.2.3 How to evaluate the Infocounter ....................................................................... 7
3.3 Image quality check ............................................................................. 9
4 Maintenance points - Power off ........................................ 10

4.1 Check of general condition ............................................................... 10
4.2 Check of condition of belts and gears ............................................. 10
4.3 Visual check of the cables................................................................. 10
4.4 Cleaning of the suction cups ............................................................ 11
4.5 Cleaning of Electronics Compartment ............................................. 11
4.6 Cleaning of Power Supply Air Inlet................................................... 12
4.7 Check and Cleaning of Drum ............................................................ 12
4.8 Cleaning of Thermal print head ........................................................ 13
4.9 Electrical check .................................................................................. 14
4.9.1 Basic Protective Earth Test............................................................................. 14
4.9.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations. ...................................... 15
5 Maintenance points - Power on ........................................ 16
5.1 Check of safety switches................................................................... 16

5.2 SW patch installation......................................................................... 16

5.3 Film calibration................................................................................... 17
5.4 Density Reproduction Check ............................................................ 17
5.5 Test image evaluation........................................................................ 19
5.6 Host system image quality check..................................................... 20
6 Completion of the maintenance........................................ 20

6.1 Backup Data on CF Card ................................................................... 20
6.2 Reset of the relative counters in the Infocounter............................ 21
6.3 Customer Conversation .................................................................... 21

Chapter 9 / II DRYSTAR 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
1 Safety
⇒ The DRYSTAR 5302 is suitable for continuous operation.

⇒ The DRYSTAR 5302 enables or helps in the diagnosis of a patient.
When operating or maintaining the DRYSTAR 5302 always observe the

following safety guidelines:
• Have electrical or mechanical defects repaired by skilled personnel only!
• Do not override or disconnect the integrated safety features.
• Ventilation openings may not be covered.
• Always switch off the DRYSTAR 5302 and disconnect the power cord
from the outlet before carrying out any maintenance work.
Always take into account the markings provided on the inside and outside
of the printer. A brief overview of these markings and their meaning is
given below:
Safety warning, indicating that the DRYSTAR 5302 User and

Reference Manuals should be consulted before making any
connections to other equipment. The use of accessory equipment
not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this
printer may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting
system. Consideration relating to the choice of accessory
equipment shall include:
Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment
has been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC
60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-2 harmonized national standard.
In addition, all configurations must comply with the medical
electrical systems standard IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes
the connections acts as system configurator and is responsible
for complying with the systems' standard. If required contact your
Agfa Service Organization.
In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any
covers.
Caution hot:
Keep hands clear from the Thermal Print Head.
Type B equipment:
Indicates that the DRYSTAR 5302 complies within the limits for
type B equipment.

Supplementary protective earth connector:

Provides a connection between the DRYSTAR 5302 and the
potential equalization busbar of the electrical system as found
in medical environments. This plug should never be
unplugged before the power is turned off and the power plug
has been removed.
Intergrounding connector:
Provides a connection between the printer and other
equipment which might exhibit minor ground potential
differences. These differences may degrade the quality of
communication between different equipment. Never remove
connections to this terminal.
Protective earth (ground)
Provides a connection between the printer and the protective
earth of the mains. Do not remove this connection, because
this will have a negative influence on the leakage current.
Power/Reset Button
Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall
outlet in order to disconnect the unit entirely from the mains.
Precautions for use in USA only:
Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the
printer is connected to a 240 V/60 Hz source instead of a
120 V/60 Hz source.
Transport after installation
Before moving the printer, always switch off the machine. The DRYSTAR
5302 should always be transported by 2 persons. When doing this, the
stability and the structure of the table top have to be taken into account.
The printer should not be placed on a soft surface, since this might
prevent appropriate ventilation and cause overheating. Nothing else
should be installed on the same table, and measures should be taken to
prevent table shock, while this may cause image artifacts. The appliance
shall only be transported with all covers closed. The appliance shall not be
transported continuously from one location to the other. Do not lift the
printer by the output tray.
Waste disposal and environmental regulations

In most countries DRYSTAR film is considered industrial waste and is not
allowed to be disposed of as household waste. Please consult your local
waste disposal regulations. Agfa recommends to have DRYSTAR film
waste hauled away by a licensed company.
After its life span, do not dispose of the DRYSTAR 5302 without
consideration of local waste disposal regulations. Please consult your
local service organization.

2 Introduction
The maintenance steps described in this document are based on the
technically required measures to guarantee the proper operation of the
printer.
The maintenance points have been arranged in a chronologically suitable
order to make the work routines as efficient as possible. The sequence of the
maintenance points in the checklist (see appendix) is identical with the
maintenance instructions.
Additional maintenance steps can be required according to national
regulations.
2.1 Maintenance frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out:

• every 25.000 printed films, or
• every 12 months, whichever comes first.
2.2 Required time
• Time required for the maintenance: ≤ 2 hours,
2.3 Required tools

Description Order Number / Comment
Calibrated densitometer recommended types are
• MacBeth TR-924
• X-Rite 301
• X-Rite 310
• X-Rite 331
• X-Rite 341
• Gretag D200-2
Flash light commercially available
Loop 8x CM+9.9579.9904.0
Service PC with Drystar 5302 Density For Service PC specifications refer to
Reproduction Check files chapter 3.2, Tools.
Density reproduction check files are
available via MEDNET, GSO Library
Waterproof pen commercially available
Wrist strap CM+9.9999.0830.0

2.4 Required cleaning material
Cleaning material Order Number

Agfa Cleaning Tissue (as alternative to CM+309931.0
Isopropyl alcohol or Ethanol and Lint
free cloth). Box of 50 pieces.
Isopropyl alcohol or Ethanol Commercially available
Lint free cloth Commercially available
Ink eraser 'Pelikan' 10+9.9999.1176.0
Vacuum cleaner
220/240V, 50Hz CM+9.9999.0895.0
110/115V, 60Hz CM+9.9999.0896.0
2.5 Required spare parts
The following spare parts are part of the Maintenance-assortment

CM+0 5366 0999 733
Description Order Number Case of Exchange/ Usage
Air Filter CM+343350.X Exchange each maintenance
Always have the latest Drystar 5302 software patches available on the
Service PC.
Depending of the urgency and classification of a software patch it might be
necessary to update the printer software.

3 Diagnostics
The diagnostics before the maintenance comprise following tasks:
Task Details see..
Questioning of the customer 3.1
Infocounter analysis 3.2
Image quality check 3.3
3.1 Questioning of the customer

• Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last
maintenance.
3.2 Infocounter analysis

To view the infocounter a service PC is required.
Two possibilities exist to get the infocounter on the Service PC:
# Type of Infocounter analysis: Refer to ...

A Via Printers Infocounters Report 3.2.1
B Via Service Command session 3.2.2
We recommend to use for Infocounter Analysis method A, 'Via Printers

Infocounters Report', as this is the fastest way to access the infocounter.
Method B, 'Via Service Command session ' might be useful, when you can
access a PC in the hospital network for a short time, to save the infocounter
file on the printer CF card for analysis on the Service PC.

Welcome to this
SERVICE TOOLS
List of errors
A Printer Infocounters report
QA Report Page
Software versions
Remote sessions
Show printer status
Enter service command session B
Scalingtools
Connectivity Setup
Welcome to this
7 Service Actions DryStar 5302 printer
LPD Profile Editor
5 Logging Printqueue editor
Service - Loggings
Controller logging
2. Infocounters
1. To printer flash card
ModuleModules
2. To this computer
repair
Go back
536609cf.cdr
Figure 1
3.2.1 Infocounter Analysis via Printers Infocounters Report

Required Tools
• Service PC, required to connect to the printer and analyze the infocounter.

Service PC
network
Tools - Printer Infocounters 536632el.cdr
Report"
(5) Analyze the infocounter file as
described in section 3.2.3, Figure 2

3.2.2 Infocounter analysis via Service Command session
Required Tools
• Service PC, required to connect to the printer and analyze the infocounter

Service PC
network
Tools - Enter Service Command 536632el.cdr
Session - 7 Service Actions - 5

Logging - 2 Infocounters"
(5) Save the infocounter file to the Figure 3
service PC or the CF card.
(6) Unzip the infocounters ZIP file
(7) Analyze the infocounter.txt file
as described in section 3.2.3,
3.2.3 How to evaluate the Infocounter
infocounter
1.1 Serial number and Compare device serial number with chapter 8
Installation date ‘Manufacturing Standard Modification’ to
determine whether the device possibly requires a
modification.
Refer to 3.3 (infocounter.txt), ‘HW Modification
History’, to check already made modifications.
1.4 Software Info Compare the currently installed SW version with
the latest SW version described in chapter 3.8,
SW releases, patches. In case a recommended
SW patch is available, install this SW patch.
Refer to section 5.2.

infocounter
2.3 Reliability Should normally be not higher than 0.05. Higher
fault rates need a thorough investigation.
3.3 Hardware Modification By comparing the status of the device with the
History available modifications (refer to Technical
Documentation chapter 8) the exact hardware
status can be determined.
3.4 Software modification By checking the software modification history it
history can be determined, whether a recent software
upgrade solved a problem, that occurred quite
often in the error list in the past
5.3 Retries Many retries (> 1%, based on relative prints)
have to be investigated: They may reduce the
throughput of the device.
5.7 Error History Check which errors occurred in the last days,
how often they appeared as well as the CBF
(cycles between failures) of these errors. This
gives an overview of the current status of the
machine.
5.8 Error list (sorted by Troubleshoot these errors with the help of the
relative) and technical documentation, chapter 3.3,
‘Troubleshooting’.
5.9 Error list (sorted by
total):

3.3 Image quality check
(1) In the browser pages select menu

"Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Print Testimage"
(2) Print following test images on the
largest format available in the film
magazines:
• STI1.ZIP
• STI2.ZIP
• medical_image.ZIP
The test image as displayed

in Figure 4 to Figure 6 will be
printed.
(3) Mark the test films with a

waterproof pen as testfilm before Figure 4
maintenance
Figure 5 Figure 6

4 Maintenance points - Power off

The maintenance with powered-off machine comprises following tasks:
Task Details: see...

Check of general condition 4.1
Check of condition of belts and gears 4.2
Visual check of the cables 4.3
Cleaning of the suction cups 4.4
Cleaning of Electronics 4.5
Cleaning of Power Supply Air Inlet 4.6
Check and Cleaning of Drum 4.7
Cleaning of Thermal print head 4.8
Electrical check 4.9
4.1 Check of general condition

(1) Perform a visual check of
• Power- and network cables.
• Covers
• The Output tray
• The upper and lower Input tray.
(2) Disconnect the power and network cable
(3) Remove the left and right cover to prepare the printer for the next steps
(4) Remove the films in the film trays including white plastic sheet
4.2 Check of condition of belts and gears

(1) Check all belts and gears for visible wear
4.3 Visual check of the cables

(1) Check cables inside the printer: The insulation may not show any sign of
wear or damage.

4.4 Cleaning of the suction cups

(1) Pull out the upper pickup unit
(2) Clean the suction cups with a lint
free cloth lightly moistened with
1
Isopropyl alcohol.
(3) Insert the upper pickup unit
(4) Repeat this step for the lower
pickup unit
536609da.cdr
Figure 7
536609cc.cdr 536609db.cdr
Figure 8 Figure 9
4.5 Cleaning of Electronics Compartment

(1) Remove the EMI shielding
(2) Clean the electronics
compartment with a vacuum
cleaner.
536609ac.cdr
Figure 10

4.6 Cleaning of Power Supply Air Inlet

(1) Clean the power supply air inlet
with a vacuum cleaner.
Figure 11
4.7 Check and Cleaning of Drum

(1) Open the top cover
(2) Open the "Hold down bracket"
(3) Open the TH Module
(4) Remove the flat belt
(5) Check the drum for dirt or
damage by turning at the drum
drive pulley.
(6) In case signs of damage are
visible, also check the STI2 test
image printed under step "3.3
Image quality check": A damage 536609df.cdr
will be visible in the flatfield area

Figure 12
of the STI2 test image in distance
of 111 mm.
(7) Clean the rubber of the drum with
a lint free cloth lightly moistened
with Isopropyl alcohol or Ethanol
(8) Remount the flat belt

4.8 Cleaning of Thermal print head

(1) Clean the TH resistor line with a
lint free cloth lightly moistened
with Isopropyl - alcohol or a
cleaning tissue.
• The last cleaning action must
be carried out in one way!
• For the Isopropyl alcohol
observe the rule: As less water
is in the alcohol as better. We
recommend using a 90%
536609cg.cdr
Isopropyl alcohol.
(2) Remount all covers Figure 13
(3) Insert both input trays
Caution:
• Be carefull at TH cleaning.
• The electronic circuits under the IC cover can be damaged.
• During cleaning do not press against the IC cover.
Only use very little alcohol to moisten the cloth.

4.9 Electrical check

The electrical check is split up in two steps:
Step Task Details see..

1 Perform the basic protective earth test 4.9.1
2 Perform the electrical check according to 4.9.2
National Regulations.
4.9.1 Basic Protective Earth Test

(1) Use a multimeter that is
capable to measure a
resistance < 1 Ohm
connector of the mains input
(3) Put the other probe at a few
could touch. 536631JN.cdr
The electrical resistance has to

be ≤ 0.2 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 14. 2
Figure 14

(4) Insert the power cord at the

printer side; leave it
disconnected at the wall side.
connector of the mains
connector.
(6) Put the other probe at a few 536631JN.cdr

could touch.
The electrical resistance in this
case has to be ≤ 0.3 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 15.
Figure 15
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement exceeds the limits (0.2
Ohm without mains cable; 0.3 Ohm with mains cable) check the printer for
loose grounding connections!
4.9.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations.

(1) Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations.
The electrical checks that have to be performed in certain intervals (e.g. each
12 months) or after certain service actions (repair and/or maintenance)
depend on National Regulations.
Example for Germany: BGV A3 and DIN VDE 0751 or subsequent
regulations.

5 Maintenance points - Power on

The maintenance with powered-on machine comprises following tasks:
Task Details: see...
Check of safety switches 5.1
SW patch installation 5.2
Film calibration 5.3
Density Reproduction Check 5.4
Test image evaluation 5.5
Host system image quality check 5.6
5.1 Check of safety switches

(1) Switch on the printer. Wait till it
shows the READY screen (takes
approx. 7 minutes)
(2) Open top cover
(3) Check display message: It must
show "Close top cover"
536609fa.cdr
Figure 16
5.2 SW patch installation

(1) Install the latest SW patch, in case a recommended SW patch for the
printer is available. Refer to chapter 3.8, Software Releases, Patches.

5.3 Film calibration

How? (1) Select in key-operator menu
Calibration'
display.
second input tray
536336as.cdr
Figure 17
5.4 Density Reproduction Check

Background With the density reproduction check the difference for a specific film type
Information between optical density defined in the sensitometric calibration file and the
printed optical density, measured with an external densitometer is checked.
This is a plausibility check for the CDM: In case the measured density values
are out of the specified range, the CDM requires a re-calibration.
This procedure must be carried out with every used film type:
Service Command Session - 3 Print Testimage"
(2) Print out LinCheck.zip and measure the density of the eleven 100 % –
0% fields with a calibrated MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite
301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag D200-2 densitometer.
(3) To check linearity fill in measured values in corresponding Excel file:
Ds5302 density reproduction check DT2B.xls or
Ds5302 density reproduction check DT2C.xls
These Excel files can be downloaded from MedNet, download area

'GSO library - Hardcopy - Dry Imagers - Drystar 5302 - Freeware'.

(4) After the measured values are filled in, the density reproduction is
calculated automatically.
(5) At the right hand side of the table is shown, whether the Density
Reproduction is ok or not. In case it is not ok you are requested to
carry out a CDM calibration.
Select densitometer: X-rite 341

4 Dmax = 314
Square Measured density Target density Density diff. Check

100% 20 20 0 0
90% 47 49,4 -2,4 0
80% 73 78,8 -5,8 0
70%
60%
104
133
108,2
137,6
-4,2
-4,6
0
0
Density Reproduction = OK
50%
40%
163
189
167
196,4
-4
-7,4
0
0
No CDM calibration needed for DT2B film
30% 218 225,8 -7,8 0
20% 246 255,2 -9,2 0
10% 274 284,6 -10,6 0
0% 306 314 -8 0
When entering the measured density values the decimal point appears in a different spot,
e.g. measured value = 0.23, value to enter = 23.0
Density Lower limit Upper limit
0 0 0 Density difference LinCheck image DT2B film in Ds 5302
30 -5 5
45 -7 7
20
60 -8 8
75 -9 9 15
90 -10 10 X-rite 310
105 -11 11 10 X-rite 331
Density Difference
120 -12 12 X-rite 341

135 -12 12 5
X-rite 301 Lower limit
150 -13 13 Mac Beth TR924
0 Upper limit
165 -13 13 Gretag D200-2
180 -14 14 Density difference
-5
195 -14 14
210 -14 14 -10
225 -15 15
240 -15 15 -15
255 -15 15
-20
270 -16 16
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
285 -16 16
300 -16 16 Target Density
315 -16 16
536609af.cdr
Figure 18
(1) The measured density values have to be entered without decimal point.
(e.g. measured value = .23, value to enter = 23)

5.5 Test image evaluation

Service Command Session - 3 Print Testimage".
(2) Print following test images on the largest format available in the film
trays:
• STI1.ZIP
• STI2.ZIP
• medical_image.ZIP
(3) Mark the test films with a waterproof pen as testfilms after maintenance
(4) Check all three images at the lightbox. Following items must been
checked:
o Line artifacts in transport direction
o Line artifacts vertical to the transport direction
o Point artifacts
o Surface artifacts
(5) Evaluate the test images at follows:

1. If no artifacts are seen on the STI1 / STI2 image continue with
next step
2. If artifacts seen on STI1 / STI2 image aren’t visible on the
medical_image continue with next step.
3. In other case (i.e. artifacts which are visible in STI1 / STI2 are
visible on medical_image, too) refer to Technical Documentation
chapter "3.3 Troubleshooting”
(6) Compare the test images "after maintenance" with the test images made
"before maintenance": The image quality of the last printed
medical_image and STI1/STI2 test image must be equal or better than
the images made before maintenance.

5.6 Host system image quality check

(1) Print a diagnostic image from every host system.
(2) Check images of each host at the lightbox for artifacts in diagnostic
image.
(3) In case artifacts are visible, compare with artifacts in last STI1 /STI2
image.
o In case artifacts are also visible in STI1 / STI2 image, refer to
Technical Documentation chapter "3.3 Troubleshooting”.
o In case artifact is only visible in images of a specific host but not in
STI1 / STI2 image, initiate a service call of modality service engineer
6 Completion of the maintenance

The Completion of the maintenance comprises following tasks:
Task Details see..

Backup Data on CF Card 6.1
Reset of Maintenance Action counters and relative 6.2
Counters in the Infocounter
Customer Conversation 6.3
6.1 Backup Data on CF Card
(1) Open the upper film tray and take

out the CF card.
(2) Insert the CF card in the printer
CF card reader
(3) In the Key-operator menu select
"4 Save configuration".
printer display.
536609fl.cdr
536336as.cdr
Figure 19
536609fl.cdr
536336as.cdr

Figure 20
6.2 Reset of Maintenance Action counters and relative Counters in the

Infocounter
(1) In the Browser menu select "Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service
Command Session - 7 Service Actions - 4 Maintenance - 4 Clear relative
counters".
(2) Select ' 7 Service Actions - 4 Maintenance - 1 Maintenance Settings'
(3) Select 'y' for yes at each desired 'Reset Item'
(4) Select "Accept Changes". Refer to Figure 21
(5) When leaving the Service menu select "Preventive maintenance" as
service action.
Welcome to this
Service - Service actions

Maintenance Action Cycles Factory Current Active Reset Item
to go settings settings
1
Y Y
Thermal head cleaning required 0 5000 5000 N N
Y Y
Replace thermal head anti dust filter 19030 25000 25000 N N
52520 Y Y
Replace thermal head (end of life) 62500 62500 N N
1898 5000 5000 Y Y

Film calibration upper tray required N N
2505 5000 5000 Y Y
Film calibration lower tray required N N
0 5000 5000 Y Y
Service maintenance required N N
Accept Changes Discard Changes Reset Values

536609fk.cdr
Figure 21
6.3 Customer Conversation

(1) Fill out the Maintenance checklist and hand it out to the customer.
(2) Explain the results of the maintenance to the customer.

AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert AG, Germany
Herausgegeben von / Published by / Edité par /
Agfa-Gevaert AG
Fototechnik
D - 81539 München
Printed in Germany / Imprimé en Allemagne

HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Global Services Organisation Checklist
Order-No.: DD+DIS149.05E
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
Work Instruction for order no. SN Film cycles
The maintenance has to be carried out:
Every 12 months or 25 000 printed films
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions DD+DIS149.05E.
Diagnostics not
OK OK
Questioning of the • Questioning of the customer about problems with
customer the printer.
Infocounter analysis • Read-out and analyzation of the infocounter
Image quality check • Printing of STI1, STI2 and medical test image for
comparison with test images at final system check


Maintenance Checklist DD+DIS149.05E
Maintenance points - Power off not

OK OK
Check of general • Visual check of power and network cable.
condition • Visual check of covers and film magazines
Check of condition of • Visual check of all belts and gears in the printer.
belts and gears
Visual check of the • Check of cables inside the printer for damage
cables
Cleaning of the suction • Cleaning of the suction cups of both film pickup
cups assemblies with a lint free cloth lightly moistened
with Isopropyl alcohol
Cleaning of Electronics • Cleaning of the Electronic rack with a vacuum
rack cleaner.
Cleaning of Power • Cleaning of the Power supply air inlet with a
supply air inlet vacuum cleaner
Check and Cleaning of • Check of the rubber of the drum for damage.
Drum • Cleaning of the rubber of the drum with a lint free
cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl alcohol or
Ethanol.
Cleaning of Thermal • Cleaning of the Thermal print head with a lint free
print head cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl alcohol
Electrical check • Check of the protective earth resistance

Maintenence Checklist Page 2 / 4 DRYSTAR 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
DD+DIS149.05E Maintenance Checklist
Maintenance points - Power on not

OK OK
Check of safety • Opening of top cover to check function of safety
switche switche
SW patch installation • Installation of SW patch, in case a recommended
SW patch for the printer is available
Film calibration • Calibration of the films in both input trays.
Density Reproduction • Density Reproduction Check to confirm proper
Check operating CDM. Execution of CDM calibration if
not okay.
Test image evaluation • Printing of STI1, STI2 and medical test image
• Comparison with test images made during printer
diagnostics
• Check for artifacts on the film. In case of artifacts
in STI1 / STI2 and medical test image
troubleshooting as described in chapter 3.3
Troubleshooting.
Host system image • Printing of diagnostic image from every host
quality check system
• Check concerning artifacts in diagnostic image.
Comparison with artifacts in last STI1 /STI2
image.
o In case artifacts are also visible in STI1 / STI2
image, troubleshooting as described in chapter
3.3 Troubleshooting.
o In case artifact is only visible in images of a
specific host but not in STI1 / STI2 image,
initiation of service call of modality service
engineer
Completion not
OK OK
Backup • Backup of machine specific parameters
Reset of Maintenance • Reset of Maintenance action counters
action counters and
• Reset of relative infocounter
relative infocounter
• Confirmation of the maintenance in the printer
service menu.
Customer conversation • Explanation of results of preventive maintenance.

Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5302 Maintenence Checklist Page 3 / 4
Maintenance Checklist DD+DIS149.05E
Remarks:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................... ...................................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician Customer

Maintenence Checklist Page 4 / 4 DRYSTAR 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
HEALTHCARE Chapter 10
Imaging Services Service Bulletins
Drystar 5302
Type 5366/0100
► Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download.
Please download the Service Bulletins from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Hardcopy Dry Imagers Drystar 5302 Service Bulletin

service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v01
DD+DIS150.05E Service Bulletins


HEALTHCARE Chapter 11
Imaging Services Installation Planning
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS148.05E.

eq_11_install-planning_e_template_v04
1
1 2 3
DD+DIS148.05E Installation Planning
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and
on the product.


12-2007 5366/100 Agfa Company Confidential
1 2 3
This document contains all planning data including the required measures to be carried
out on site prior to the machine delivery.
This chapter is divided into:
• construction planning data
• technical connection and performance data
• safety instructions, listing of certificates

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1:
1.2 11-2007 • Adapted scope of delivery (Before: Only English user
manual delivered as paper manual; Now: additional
Chinese simplified and Spanish). See section 3.1
• Added detailed specifications for power cables which
are part of delivery. See section 3.1
• Corrected wrong outlet and cable specification for US:
Wrong: NEMA 6-15p outlet/cable
Correct: NEMA 5-15p outlet/cable.
See section 8.
Document Title
n.a. n.a.


1 2 3
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLIST................................................................................6

2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW...............................................................................................................7
3 SCOPE OF DELIVERY AND ACCESSORIES.........................................................................8
3.1 Scope of delivery ......................................................................................................................8
3.2 Options......................................................................................................................................9
4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................................10

5 MINIMUM FREE SPACE FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE .....................................11
6 SYSTEM INTEGRATION .......................................................................................................12
6.1 Network integration parameters..............................................................................................12
6.2 Modality Setup Parameters.....................................................................................................14
6.3 Setup of Security and Privacy (optional).................................................................................16
6.3.1 List of Key-operator, Service People and Specialists with Access Rights .............................16
6.3.2 Audit Logging Server and NTP Server parameters ................................................................18
6.3.3 Availability of certificates.........................................................................................................18
6.4 Service Host Parameters ........................................................................................................18
6.5 Example for System Integration..............................................................................................19
7 AMBIENT CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................20

7.1 During operation .....................................................................................................................20
7.2 During transport and storage ..................................................................................................20
8 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................21

8.1 Electrical connections at the printer ........................................................................................22
9 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................22
9.1 Type overview .........................................................................................................................22
9.2 Functional data .......................................................................................................................23
9.2.1 Pixel Matrices..........................................................................................................................23
9.3 Electrical data..........................................................................................................................24
9.4 Climatic data ...........................................................................................................................24
9.5 Sound emission data ..............................................................................................................24
9.6 Interface data ..........................................................................................................................24


1 2 3
9.7 Service data ............................................................................................................................24
9.8 Dimensions and weight...........................................................................................................25
9.8.1 Dimensions, packed machine .................................................................................................25
9.8.2 Dimensions, closed machine ..................................................................................................25
9.8.3 Dimensions, opened machine.................................................................................................25
9.8.4 Weight .....................................................................................................................................25
10 SAFETY STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS .......................................................................26


1 2 3
1 Installation Planning Checklist

# Step Goal See Okay
section
1. Make yourself familiar with the To see in which surrounding the printer 2
System Overview will be installed
2. Make yourself familiar with the Basic information, to see whether 3.1
scope of delivery additional, site specific material for
installation might be required
3. Make yourself familiar with the To be able to order required accessories 3.2
available accessories before the installation
4. Have a look at the machine To be able to check, whether the printer 4
dimensions fits in the desired installation place
5. Check the required free space To see whether enough free space for 5
around the printer. operation, repair and maintenance is
available.
6. Organize the required network To have all parameters in advance, to 6
parameters to hook up the printer prevent a delay during installation
in the existing network.
7. Get up-to-date Connectivity To be prepared for modality specific 6.2
Release Documents for the adjustments at the printer
modalities which shall print on the
printer
8. Compare the required ambient To prevent installation of the printer in an 7
and climatic conditions with the inappropriate environment, leading to
condition at the installation place. functional faults.
9. Check the required electrical To be able to initiate all required 8
connection prerequisites in advance to allow proper
electrical connections
10. Make yourself familiar with the To have all printer parameters available 9
printer specifications which might be required for people who
are in involved in installation and
operation of the printer.
11. Have a look at the printer safety To have the safety standards and 10
standards and regulations regulations for which the printer is tested
available in case they are requested by
the hospital administration.
12. Confirm the installation readiness To be sure that all required pre- Last
installation conditions are fulfilled. Page


1 2 3
2 System Overview
536611JK.CDR
Figure 1
Device Comment
Modality The modality has to support the DICOM print protocol
DRYSTAR 5302 Dry printer for 14x17", 14x14", 14x11", 10x12", 8x10" DT2
blue base or clear base films
NOTE:
Remark to an installation in a 'HIPAA conform environment':
In Figure 1 two additional, optional modules are not listed:
1) Audit logging server: This is a computer in the networking allowing to store all
communication between the different devices in the network.
2) NTP (Network Time Protocol) Server: This is a computer providing time
synchronization. It is useful for audit logging, so that all messages of all
devices have the same time reference.
Both devices are only required in a 'HIPAA' environment, where high data security is
required.
For more information refer to section 6.3.


1 2 3
3 Scope of Delivery and Accessories
3.1 Scope of delivery

NOTE:
The printer is delivered with all parts, which are required to install it in an existing
Ethernet network.
Device name: DRYSTAR 5302

Type: 5366/100
ABC Code EQOZV
Scope of delivery
• 1 Basic DRYSTAR 5302 including:
- 2 input trays adjustable for all film sizes
- 1 output tray
• 1 Compact Flash card (stored in backup CF card slot in input tray)
• 2 power cables, 3 m long (Europe / US)
• 1 UTP network cable, 5 m long (2 x RJ45 connection) incl. extension piece
• 1 Reference manual (English)
• 3 User Manuals (English; Chinese simplified, Spanish)
• 1 CD with all user manuals and Plug&Play installation manuals in all languages*
• 1 packing list
• 1 Plug and Play Installation manual (English)
• 25 films 14x17" DT 2B for test purposes
• 25 films 8x10" DT 2B for test purposes
• 2 sets film type labels
• 1 Chinese warning sticker
• 1 CE declaration of conformity
• 1 China ROHS declaration
• 1 Installation Report
*available languages: Chinese simplified, Chinese traditional, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Estonian,
Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Latvian, Lithuanian, Norwegian,
Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Slovakian, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Vietnamese


1 2 3
IMPORTANT:
The printer is delivered with two 3 m power cables. See Figure 9.
• For US: NEMA 5-15P with IEC C13 plug (female)
• For Europe: CEE7/7 with IEC C13 plug (female)
Organize a power cable for your country locally.
See section 8 for “Mains connection in the installation room” specifications.
3.2 Options
Item Order Number Comment

Mobile Kit EX2DV To be used in earthquake areas and in mobile
usage. May not be used in military vessels.
Figure 2
NOTE:
REMOTE SERVICE:
In general it is possible to diagnose and repair the printer to a certain extent remotely.
To enable remote service of the printer remote access has first to be organized.
Remote Access is established via the Agfa own Secure Remote Service System
(SRSS).
For more information to the SRSS refer to MEDNET – GSO Library - Technical
Services - Service Delivery - SRSS


1 2 3
4 Machine dimensions
Closed machine:
67,6 cm
.2 m 26.6"
28 5 c
"
.
71
72,
8
28. cm 536611jo.cdr
7"
Figure 3
Opened machine:
76 cm
29,9"
,7 m
45 6 c
"
11
536611jn.cdr
536611jp.cdr
Figure 4 Figure 5


1 2 3
5 Minimum free space for operation and maintenance
23 m m
60
0
. 6"
23 mm
0
60
.6"
23 mm
80
0
.6"
31 mm
0
.5"
54
23 m m
60
0
.6"
23 mm
0
60
.6"
536611JL.cdr
Space required for servicing and installation Space required for normal use
Figure 6
NOTE:
In case the minimum free space for installation and repair is not available, the printer
can be carried at a different place. The printer weight is 90 kg (198 lb). It can be
carried by three people.
Caution:
The device is heavy (90 kg;198 lb). Risk of injuries.
• At least three people have to lift the device from one position to the other.
• Use proper foot and hand protection when lifting the device.
• The table might break and cause injuries or damage to the device. The device
weight may be too heavy for the table.
• Communicate to the customer, that the table must be able to carry more
than 90 kg (198 lb)


1 2 3
6 System integration
The system integration comprises the following tasks:
Task Refer to
Network integration of the printer 6.1
Modality setup 6.2
Setup of security and privacy (optional) 6.3
Setup of the Agfatek Link Service Host 6.4
For each of these steps various parameters are required in advance. They can be
entered in the following tables:
6.1 Network integration parameters
To connect the printer to the hospital network, the following parameters are required by
the hospital network administrator:
Parameter Default Value
Printer IP address 169.254.10.10 .............................................
Hostname ds5302 .............................................
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0 .............................................
Router IP address - .............................................
Printer AE title* DS5302 .............................................
Domain name - .............................................
The Hospital Network Administrator needs the following information about the printer:
Network connection RJ45 UTP, 100BaseT acc. to IEC601
Transmission protocol DICOM Version 3.0; FTP, Telnet, HTTP, SNMP,
SMTP
Image formats DICOM


1 2 3
*NOTE:
• It is possible to define more than one AE title at the printer – this means it's
possible to have two or more “logical” DRYSTAR 5302 printers.
• To configure logical SCP printers can be necessary, in case for example printing is
initiated at a PACS system, which has several modalities as input.
Example:
The PACS system collects CR and CT images.
• CR images shall be printed with taste LUT Kanamori
• CT images shall be printed with linear taste LUT.
Problem:
The workstation at the PACS system has one AE title only. The DRYSTAR 5302 does
not recognize, for which type of modality (CR or CT) the user wants to print.
Solution:
• Create one logical printer 'DRYSTAR5302_CR' and one 'DRYSTAR5302_CT'.
• Create two different host profiles for the two logical printers, one with Kanamori
LUT, the other with linear taste LUT.
• In the workstation setup both printers: The user has to select the proper logical
printer, depending on the application.
⇒ The number of logical SCP printers is not limited. As each configured SCP server
consumes resources of the printer, use as little SCP servers as possible. Rule of
thumb: Define max. 4 logical printers.


1 2 3
6.2 Modality Setup Parameters
To connect the printer to the DICOM modality, the following parameters are required by
the hospital network administrator:
Modality 1: ................................................... (nickname* of the modality; max. 8

characters (letters/figures))
Parameter Value
Modality brand ...........................................................................
Modality type ...........................................................................
Modality AE_title ...........................................................................

Parameter Value
Modality brand ...........................................................................
Modality type ...........................................................................

Parameter Value
Modality brand ...........................................................................
Modality type ...........................................................................

Parameter Value
Modality brand ...........................................................................
Modality type ...........................................................................


1 2 3
NOTE:
*Nickname: The name of the modality which is used by the personnel.
Example: The workstation "Siemens Icon Power PC" could be named
"Icon" in the daily use. At the printer configuration this name is entered
as "nickname".
IMPORTANT:
For printer connectivity have the up-to-date Interface Status Report and
corresponding Connectivity Release Document available:
Interface Status Report:
The up-to-date interface status report lists all modalities, for which the connectivity to
the DRYSTAR 5302 is tested and released.
The ISR (Interface Status Report) is available on MEDNET - HealthCare Library -
General Info - Connectivity & Application - Interface Status Report - Application Info
(only via Intranet – not via Internet).
The ISR also lists the Connectivity Release Document numbers.
Example see Figure 7
PHILIPS, CR DRYSTAR 4500(M)/5500/5300

EASYVISION RAD 4.2 Image : ETHERNET II
DICOM 3.0
Control : ETHERNET II
DICOM PRINT MANAGEMENT SCU
Status : Released for installation
Document : 000874
Remarks :
5365_reg11_006_e.cdr
Connectivity Release
Document Number
Figure 7
Connectivity Release Documents:

Specific connectivity information for the DRYSTAR 5302 can be found in the
Connectivity Release Documents.
The Connectivity Release Documents are available on MEDNET (Intranet and
Internet), Imaging Library - General Info - Connectivity & Application
Not all modalities that are tested for Drystar 4500 (M)/5500/5300 are also tested for
Drystar 5302. As the controller part for all printers is identical, except behaviour
regarding film sizes and output tray, modalities that are tested for Drystar 4500
(M)/5500/5300 can also be connected to
Drystar 5302.
Exception: The Drystar 5302 - in opposite to Drystar 4500 M,
Drystar 5500/5503 - cannot be used for Mammography applications.


1 2 3
6.3 Setup of Security and Privacy (optional)

In case HIPAA compliance is required, following items have to be checked in advance:
Item Refer to
Users and service people who may have access 6.3.1
Audit Logging Server and NTP Server parameters 6.3.2
Availability of certificates 6.3.3
NOTE:
The parameters for 'Security and Privacy' have to be determined and entered by the
'hospital security responsible person'.
Please hand out the pages of this subsection (6.3) to the 'hospital security responsible
person'.
6.3.1 List of Key-operator, Service People and Specialists with Access Rights
The list of Key-operators is limited to 50. The Key-Operator has access to the Key-
Operator webpages of the printer.
Following conventions are valid:

• Username: min. 4 characters, max 20 characters
• Network password: min. 4 characters, max 10 characters
# User name Password

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.


1 2 3
The list of service people is limited to 8. The service people have access to the
service web pages.

# Service person name Password

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The list of Specialists is limited to 1. The Specialist has access to the specialist web
pages.

# Specialist name Password

1.


1 2 3
6.3.2 Audit Logging Server and NTP Server parameters

To setup the Audit Logging and NTP server in the printer, request the following
parameters from the hospital network administrator:
Parameter Value
Audit Logging IP address ................................................................
Audit Logging port number ................................................................
NTP server IP address ...............................................................
NTP server port number ...............................................................
6.3.3 Availability of certificates

Check with the hospital network administrator, that certificates are available for all
devices, which shall be HIPAA compliant.
NOTE:
• Agfa devices which are according to the HIPAA specifications have Agfa
certificates already loaded.
• All certificates issued by Agfa have a validity period of 10 years
6.4 Service Host Parameters
NOTE:
The AGFATEK LINK Service Host is optional in the network.
It is an optional part of the SRSS (Secure Remote Service System).
For more information to the SRSS refer to MEDNET – GSO Library - Technical
Services - Service Delivery - SRSS
Parameter Default Value

Service Host IP address 192.9.200.155 .............................................
Phone Number -- .............................................


1 2 3
6.5 Example for System Integration
IP Address:192.9.200.155 Digitizer:
CR 75.0
Service
Host
ADC QS
Ultrasound
Nickname: Digitizer 53
63
Printer 11
Modality Brand: AGFA ad
.cd
r
Modality Type: CR QS
Calling AE-Title: QS
Nickname: Ultrasound
Modality Brand: ACUSON
Modality Type: ASPEN
Calling AE-Title: US_ASPEN
IP address: 192.9.200.201
Hostname: ds5302
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Router IP address: -
Printer AE Title: DS5302
Domain name: -
Figure 8


1 2 3
7 Ambient conditions
7.1 During operation
Ambient temperature: min.: +15°C (59°F)

max.: +30°C (86°F)
Relative humidity: min.: 20%

(non condensing) max.: 75%
7.2 During transport and storage
NOTE:
• Climate conditions for storage must be in accordance with
EN60721-3-1-class 1K4
• Climate conditions for transport must be in accordance with
EN60721-3-2(1993)-class 2K4
Ambient temperature min.: - 25°C (-13°F)

during storage: max.: + 55°C (131°F)
Relative humidity min.: 10%

during storage: max.: 95%
Absolute humidity min.: 0.1 g/m³

during storage: max.: 35 g/m³
Rate of temperature max.: 1 °C/min.

change during storage
Air pressure during Min. 70 kPa

storage max.: 106 kPa
Ambient temperature min.: - 40°C (-40°F)

during transport: max.: + 70°C (158°F)
Relative humidity min.: 10%

during transport: max.: 95%


1 2 3
8 Electrical connections
Installation guidelines Electrical installations have to be done in accordance
with national regulations. Examples:
VDE (Germany) Electrical installations in the
installation room must be in compliance with the
regulations IEC 364, VDE 0100, and VDE 0107.
UL (US) Electrical installations in the installation
room must be in compliance with the regulations:
“National Electrical Code" (NEC) (NFPA70).
IMPORTANT:
A ground fault interrupter (GFI) (IN = 30 mA) must be installed at a suitable point in
the circuit (in compliance with VDE 664).
Mains connection in the VDE Double earthed pin outlet in compliance with
installation room DIN 49441 and with CEE 7 standard cover V II.
UL Earthed contact outlet for the NEMA 5-15 P plug
Mains cable Euro- CEE7/7 - H05VV - F3G - 3 x 2.5 mm² with

(part of the delivery) Version: IEC C13 plug (female); cable length 3 m
US/CAN- NEMA 5-15P - SJT, 3 x AWG 18 with
Version: IEC C13 plug (female); Cable length 3 m
US Europe
IEC C13 CEE7/7
NEMA 5-15P IEC C13

5366_chap11_001.cdr
Figure 9
Network cable UTP; AWG24; Length: 5 m

(part of the delivery)
Main switch Upon machine installation, it must be ensured that either

the mains connector or an all-pole circuit breaker for the
installation on site is located close to the machine and
easily accessible.


1 2 3
8.1 Electrical connections at the printer
Ground plug. 100 - 240 V AC

6 mm metric thread power supply
Equipotential plug
Network connection.
RJ45 UTP for 100BaseT network,
according to IEC 601
Service Interface.
RS232 Interface male
DTE 9 pin sub D (nullmodem)
536611JM.cdr
Figure 10
9 Specifications
9.1 Type overview
Printer Type
DRYSTAR 5302 5366/100


1 2 3
9.2 Functional data
Film sizes 14x17", 14x14", 14x11", 10x12", 8x10"

Throughput (films/hour) 8x10": 140 14x17": 75
Access time1st film approx. (seconds) 77
Printable area(pixels) Refer to 9.2.1
resolution(DPI) 320 (79.4 µm Pixel size)
Bits per pixel / number of grey steps 12 / 4096
Daylight film loading yes
Films per film magazine 100 films
Number of film magazines 2
Image recording type Direct thermography
Densitometer built in yes
Automatic density control yes
Hard disk capacity ≥ 73 GB
RAM Memory Plugged on Themis: 512 MB
Warm-up time Approx. 7 min. (cold printer)
9.2.1 Pixel Matrices

The DRYSTAR 5302 has two film supply trays that can be configured to 14x17",
14x14", 14x11", 10x14" or 8x10" film size. If trim is used around the images (trim is a
small, white frame around each image on the film), the diagnostic area is 6 pixels
smaller at each edge of the film.
DRYSTAR 5302 Diagnostic Printable Area in Pixels
No Annotations Annotations
Film Size
Width Height Width Height
8x10" 2376 3070 2376 2705
10x12" 3070 3653 3070 3288
14x11" 3348 4358 2983 4358
14x14" 4358 4303 4358 3938
14x17" 4358 5232 4358 4867
Table 1: Pixel Matrices


1 2 3
9.3 Electrical data
Rated voltage [~V] 100-240 AC (autosensing)

Frequency [Hz] 50/60
Power consumption [W] 70 standby
250 printing average
530 peak
9.4 Climatic data
Heat emission [kJ/h] 252 standby

900 printing average
1908 maximum
9.5 Sound emission data
Noise level: in standby: 53 dB(A) maximum

in operation: 62 dB(A) maximum
9.6 Interface data
Image / control data interface DICOM 3.0 Print SCP

Maximum number of simultaneous 10
DICOM associations
9.7 Service data
InfoCounter yes
Error diagnostics built in yes
Module exchange concept yes
Remote/preventive service capable yes


1 2 3
9.8 Dimensions and weight
9.8.1 Dimensions, packed machine
Length / depth (cm / inch) 90 / 35.4

Width (cm / inch) 87 / 34.2
Height (cm / inch) 69 / 27.2
Height incl. Pallet (cm / inch) 84 / 33.1
9.8.2 Dimensions, closed machine
Width (cm / inch) 72,8 / 28.6

Length / depth (cm / inch) 71,5 / 28.2
Height with output tray (cm / inch) 67,6 / 26.6
Height without output tray (cm / inch) 53,6 / 21.1
9.8.3 Dimensions, opened machine
Width (cm / inch) 72,8 / 28.6

Length / depth (cm / inch) 116 / 45.7
with film trays opened
Height (cm / inch) 76 / 29.9
with top cover opened
9.8.4 Weight
Printer alone (kg / lb) 90 / 198

Printer with packing incl. palette (kg / lb) 120,5 / 265,6


1 2 3
10 Safety Standards and Regulations
The printer has been tested and found to comply with the following international
standards and regulations:
• Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC

• CFR Part 21
Safety standards:
• IEC 60601-1 + A1 + A2
• EN 60601-1 + A1 + A2
• UL 60601-1:2003
• CSA 22.2 No. 601.1-M90
• GB4943-2001
Radio-interference regulations (interference suppression):
• FCC Rules 47 CFR part 15 subpart B, class A

• FCC rules 47 CFT part 15 subpart C, class B
• IEC 60601-1-2
• CISPR 11, class A
• CISPR 22, class A
• IEC 61000-4-3
• IEC 61000-4-4
• IEC 61000-4-5
• IEC 61000-4-6
• IEC 61000-3-2
• IEC 61000-3-3
• IEC 61000-4-11
• ETSI 300330
• GB9254-1998 (Class A)
• GB17625.1-2003
The DRYSTAR 5302 carries the FCC ID: HPL5366, CE, TUV, cULus and CCC label.


HEALTHCARE INSTALLATION SITE
Imaging Services READINESS CHECKLIST
Name of Field Service Engineer: _________________ Checking date:____________

Client name: ___________________________________________________________
Client address: __________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________
Contact person,
name and title: ___________________________________________________________
Client phone number: ________________________ Extension:_________________
Type of systems: ___________________ Order /OGT number: _____________________
# Item Refer to okay
1 All parts, which are required additionally to the "scope of 3.1

delivery" are available at the installation site
3 The planned installation place has enough space for 4 and 5

installation, operation and repair
4 The required system integration parameters are available 6
5 The required connectivity Release Documents are available 6.2
6 The Host System is installed and the Host System Service --

Engineer is scheduled to setup the printer at the host system.
7 The ambient conditions are within the given limits 7
8 The electrical connection is available as specified 8
Remarks:______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Signature of the FSE or Product Specialist:
1
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany


DD+DIS150.05E Glossary and Key Word Index
Chapter 12:
List of contents
1 Glossary.............................................................................................. 1
2 Key Word Index ................................................................................ 10

2005-09-09 (Typ 5366/100) Agfa Company Confidential
1 Glossary
2-Propanol (Isopropyl Alcohol used for cleaning purposes.

alcohol)
A
ADC Agfa Diagnostic Center.
A device developed by AGFA to scan X-ray
exposed phosphor plates.
AE-Title Application Entity Title.
A DICOM capable device in the network is
unambiguously identified by its IP address,
hostname and AE-Title .
Drystar 5300 has the AE-Title "DS5300" by
default. The AE-Title for the Drystar 5300 in
the DICOM Host must be identical with the
AE-Title in the Drystar 5300 itself.
The AE-Title is set up during installation.
To make a clear distinction between AE-title
and IP address, it is recommended to use
only lower case characters for the hostname.
Preferably use the same name as for the AE-
title, but in lowercase.
AGFATEK LINK Device out of the AGFATEK product
spectrum for remote service. Enables to make
a dial-up-networking connection between
local PC and the AGFA network.
Anti-static wrist strap Wrist strap made of synthetic material with
integrated thread-like metal.
Used for "grounding" the service engineer
during service at printed circuit boards.
Prevents electronic components from being
destroyed by static discharge.
APIP Agfa Picture Archiving Protocol. AGFA
network protocol for communication between
medical devices. More and more DICOM
supersedes APIP.

Glossary and Key Word Index DD+DIS150.05E
B
B/W Black and White.
Battery RAM A RAM component, whose contents is being
stored by the tension of a battery.
Blue Based Film Film with a blue colored support layer.
The fog level of this film is approx. 0.2 O.D.
See also "Clear Based Film"
Browser Application used for reading Internet pages.
The commonly used browsers are Microsoft
Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator.
C
Calibration Process which determines a reproducible
correlation between input and output values.
Clear Based Film Film with a transparent support layer.
The fog level of this film is approx. 0.15 O.D.
See also "Blue Based Film"
COM1, COM2 Names for the first two serial interfaces of a
computer
CPU (Devil) Board Printed circuit board to control the main
functions of the printer, CPU.
D
DA Converter Digital Analog Converter.
DCE Data Communications Equipment.
Term out of the RS232 specification. DCE
equipment sends data on pin 3 and receives
on pin 2. The RS232 interface from modems
or PC's is almost always DCE. To connect a
DCE with a DTE device, a standard RS232
cable is required. To establish a DCE - DCE
connection, respectively a DTE - DTE
connection a nullmodem cable is required.
See also DTE.
Densitometer Device used for measuring the optical density
of the film.

DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in

Medicine.
A network protocol, which is wide spread in
the medical world, and used for interchanging
text and images.
DICOM PMS DICOM Print Management Service.
A device which provides DICOM PMS
(= provider) makes it possible to print DICOM
images. A device which uses DICOM PMS
(= user) is able to control a DICOM printer.
The Drystar 5300 is a DICOM PMS Provider.
Dmin / Dmax Minimal / maximal optical density on the film.
DNS Domain Name System
The DNS server builds up the connection
between IP-address and Domain name.
Domain Name The Domain Name is the name for a device in
the network.
It provides for a more comfortable contact to a
network node by calling it via name instead of
the IP address. In the internet for example the
IP address 19.5.6.121 can be contacted by
the name 'johnson.com'. To identify a device
in the network via a name it has to be
registered in a DNS server. The network
system administrator determines the domain
name for Drystar 5300.
DPI Dots Per Inch.
Pixels per Inch (1 inch = 2,54 cm)
DRA Direct Remote Access.
Remote service
DTE Data Terminal Equipment.
Term out of the RS232 Specification. DTE
equipment sends data on pin 2 and receives
on pin 3.
See also DCE.
E
EEPROM Electrically Erasable, Programmable Read
Only Memory.
Memory chip that can be electronically erased
and programmed again.
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility.

EMI ElectroMagnetic Interference.

EPROM Erasable, Programmable Read Only Memory.
Memory chip that can be erased by ultraviolet
light and be electronically programmed again.
Ethernet Network carrier technology for LANs (Local
Area Networks).
F
FIFO First In, First Out.
Way of storing data that first selects the data
that have been entered first.
Used in (print) queues.
Film batch Number printed on the film packet.
It changes with every new film emulsion. Only
the films with the same film batch have
exactly the same characteristics.
Film Sensitometry Calibration of the film.
By calibrating, the printer gets a table with
certain density values for certain control
values.
Film type Film of a certain producer or a similar
producer but with different characteristics
(sensitivity, contrast).
FireWire Serial bus standard also known as
IEEE1394. Data rate up to 400 Mb/s.
Flash EPROM An EPROM in which data have to be deleted
in fixed blocks instead of separate bytes.
Fog level Lowest optical density that can be measured
on the film.
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array.
A logic chip, which can be programmed. An
FPGA can be programmed after its
production.
FSE Field Service Engineer. Service technician.
FTP File Transfer Protocol.
A network protocol required for file transfer
within the network.

H
Heat sink Assembly to absorb and dissipate heat.
It is used with the thermal print head to
dissipate its surplus heat energy.
HTTP HyperText Transmission Protocol.
Protocol that determines the data format and
the way of transmission of HTML-pages in the
World Wide Web (WWW).
Host In the computer world a host computer is a
device, which provides services and settings
for other computers.
Especially in the world of medical devices a
host system is the device at which the printer
is going to be connected to.
Hyper Terminal A Windows program used for serial data
communication between two computers.
I
ICM Image Composition Map.
Complete image data for a complete film.
These image data correspond to the several
pixels on the film that is going to be printed.
IEC International Electro technical Commission
Infocounter File in the printer, which logs lots of
information and events.
The infocounter contains for example the date
of the installation, the SW version and all the
errors that have occurred.
IP-Address Internet Protocol Address.
A 32 Bit address, which is assigned to each
TCP/IP host. Example: 192.9.200.201.
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network.
Telecommunication network which allows
different ways of communication (language,
text, data, images) to be transferred in one
united public net.

Java An object oriented programming language

developed by the American company Sun
Microsystems. It is independent of the
computer system used.
Java is used for browsers in the WWW.
K
KEY6 Assy Printed circuit board to control the printer
keypad.
L
LCD-Display Liquid Crystal Display.
By supplying a voltage the liquid crystals are
arranged such that a contrast is visible.
LED Light Emitting Diode.
Diode which emits green, yellow or red light.
LUT Look-Up Table,
contrast reference curve, e.g. Kanamori LUT.
N
Netmask Also called subnet mask. A 32 bit mask that
displays which bits are in use for the subnet
address. Subnets are used in a network to
keep it well-structured.
Null Modem Cable A RS232 cable where all the wires are
crossed over. This way for example the
receive wire at the one side is connected with
the transmit wire of the other side.
O
O.D. Optical Density
P
PACS Picture Archiving and Communication
System.

PCB Printed Circuit Board.

Pick-up Module Assembly in the printer that provides for the
transport of a film out of the input tray.
Pixel One of the individual dots that make up an
image on the film.
E.g. a 10x12" film contains 4968 x 5900
pixels.
PMS DICOM Print Management Service.
A device that provides DICOM PMS
(= provider), makes printing of DICOM
images possible. A device using DICOM
PMS (= user) can control a DICOM printer.
Drystar 5300 is a DICOM PMS provider.
Portex AGFA own operating system for medical
devices.
Postscript Imperative programming language for the
device independent description of print pages
which brings the complete data (text, images,
graphics) and their positions to a standardized
data structure. PostScript was developed in
1982 by the American company Adobe
Systems and evolved in the meantime to a
quasi-standard. A further development is
PostScript Level 2, which has got among
others things an optimized data compression.
Print drum A rubber drum in the printer that guides the
film along the thermal print head.
Prompt A symbol that appears on a computer
terminal screen. Example: C:\>
R
RAM Random Access Memory
Free accessible memory. The RAM-board is
used to store intermediate data.
RJ45 Recommended Jack 45.
A connector specification used with UTP
cables. The connectors are 8-pole flat
connectors.

Router A device in the network to connect two or

more networks. It routes incoming data
packages to the corresponding network. The
network system administrator defines the IP-
address of the router for the printer. Only if
the router IP-address is known by the printer
it is possible for the printer to send
information via the network back to devices
which are located in another segment of the
network.
RS232 Interface Computer interface to convert computer
internal parallel data into serial data and vice
versa. The interface is defined via RS232
(Recommended Standard).
RS232 cable Cable following the RS232 standard
(Recommended Standard) to connect two
RS232 interfaces (for example connection
between modem and PC).
S
SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface.
Service Interface RS232 Interface at the printer.
Service key Service tool.
Used to bridge safety switches to make it
possible to control all the devices despite the
device is opened.
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television
Engineers.
The printer is able to print out the black/white
test image named after the SMPTE for test
purposes.
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
Protocol to send e-mails between computers
in the internet.
T
TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol.
Widespread network protocol.
Telnet A network protocol that provides for logging in
to a network computer system.

TIF Tagged Image Format.

A standard format to store pixel oriented
images. GIF and JPG are more and more
superseding TIF.
TH Abbreviation of Thermal Print Head.
THEMIS board Board on the Devil Board. Responsible for
operating system and image processing..
Thermal Print Head Resistor line that transfers the image to the
film.
U
USB Universal Serial Bus.
PC bus system to attach peripherals like
scanner, keyboards etc. to PC's. Data rate
12 Mb/s and up to 480 Mb/s for USB-2.
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair.
A network cable where the wires are twisted
and without additional shielding.
V
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker.
Association of German Electro-Technicians
X
XT X-Terminal.
An Agfa program for serial data
communication between two computers.

2 Key Word Index

Order no.:
DD+DIS150.05E
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
1st Edition
HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst
Imaging Services Service Manual for Download
► Purpose of this Document

This document describes how to
• add the “order list for documentation”.
• print.
• add comments.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2 06-2008 Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a
printed manual. See section 1.
06-2008 printed in Germany
ReadMeFirst
1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation
IMPORTANT:
The “order list for documentation” is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the “order list for documentation”:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.
(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select “Order list and Front page → PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation”.
(3) Download the “order list for documentation” to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.
2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if

available.
Some pages – especially circuit diagrams for equipment – have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5

ReadMeFirst
2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters
To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:

(1) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2) Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar
(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

(4) Select "Print".
(5) Select the page range.
(6) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7) Select “OK”.
Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters


ReadMeFirst
NOTE:
“Shrink to printable area” may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
“reduce to printer margins” or “shrink oversized pages to paper size”.
2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual
To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:

(1) Select "Print".
(2) Select “All”.
(3) Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"
(see NOTE above).
(4) Select “OK”.
Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual
3 Adding Comments
• If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version ≥ 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
• This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar


ReadMeFirst
3.1 Exporting your Comments
NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”
(2) Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3) Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”.
(4) Save the file with any name.
3.2 Importing Comments
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
(2) Select “Options - Import Comments”.
(3) Browse for the comments file and press “select”.
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.



Drystar5302 Technical PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Drystar5302 Technical PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

HEALTHCARE Technical

Global Services Organisation

printed in Germany 2005-09-09

To order documentation: Tel.: xx49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3553

AGFA-GEVAERT AG HE/Im - GSO I&P

pprinted in Germany 2005-09-09

2. Functional Description High voltage ! Waiting time

3. Repair and Service

4. Reference and Circuit

5. Spare Parts List

8. Manufacturing Standard Conventions

Action, Switch the machine on Switch the machine on

Action with the mouse or the <omni-cd.exe> Double-click the

► Purpose of this document

The latest version is available via

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 3

3.1 CE Mark ...................................................................................................8

6 INTENDED USE ..................................................................................................11

8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS ..........................11

9 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.........................................................12

10 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................13

12 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION .........................................................16

13 RADIATION PROTECTION .................................................................................17

14 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION .........................17

15 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES........................17

16 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES .............18

17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES ................................20

18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES.........21

19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES..........................23

20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 4

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS ................................ 24

22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ................. 24

23 WASTE DISPOSAL ............................................................................................. 24

25 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI)................................... 25

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 5

The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 6

Icon Name and Circumstances

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 7

3.2 System Labels

Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation

Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 8

3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation

Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye.

Manufacturer AGFA GEVAERT N.V. GIUM

Figure 1: Example for Laser Classification

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 9

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 10

8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 11